Dodge Journey 2017 - Owner's Manual

2017
OWNERS MANUAL
Journey
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op-
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
portation. factured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 8

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . .6
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .6
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, contains the information you desire.
distinctive styling, and high quality.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
This Owners Manual has been prepared with the assis- of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you tions may differ from your vehicles equipment.
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
The detailed index at the back of this Owners Manual
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
enjoyable operation of your vehicle. Owners Manual:
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper- you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also
appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill
moulding and printed on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration and title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of
the engine block.
Stamped VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
VIN Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY PASSIVE ENTRY . .16
RKE Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . .16
Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . . .10 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Replacement Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Customer Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .13 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED . . .20
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED . . .13 How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .15
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .34
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .34
Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped . . .22
Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . .47
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .80
Child-Protection Door Lock System Rear
SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
includes a key fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition. 2
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
Keyless Push Button Ignition
ON/RUN will illuminate.
1 OFF
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the push 2 ACC (ACCESSORY)
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In 3 ON/RUN
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the RKE Key Fob
emergency key) of the key fob against the engine START/
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob and an emer-
STOP button and push to operate the ignition.
gency key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove compartment. cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, the ignition
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
parking.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
then pull the key out with your other hand. ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel for further information.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Emergency Key Removed
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
into the lock cylinders with either side up. could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
Ignition Or Accessory On Message should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Opening the drivers door when the ignition is in ACC or ON
(engine not running), a chime will sound to remind you to (Continued)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
WARNING! (Continued)
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the 2
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
operate power windows, other controls, or move the cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
vehicle. tion.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
cause serious injury or death. by the party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION! SENTRY KEY
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
unattended. regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
General Information The system uses a factory-mated key fob, a Keyless Push
Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are pro-
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank with
an invalid key fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
Replacement Key Fobs
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
indicates that someone tried to use an invalid key fob to electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
engine being shut off after two seconds. programmed to any other vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
CAUTION!
indicates that there is a fault in the system. Should this Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
authorized dealer. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
CAUTION! the OFF position.
Do not make modifications or alterations to the NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
the immobilization system may result in a loss of a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
security protection. is one that has never been programmed.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
problems and loss of security protection.
Customer Key Fob Programming locks are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights will
dealer. 2
turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and
General Information the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio flash.
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: Rearming Of The System
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: after 3 minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm
will rearm itself.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- To Arm The System
tion. Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved 1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF (refer to
by the party responsible for compliance could void the Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for
users authority to operate the equipment. further information).
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and
liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door
Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive key to the ON position.
Entry in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
NOTE:
hicle for further information).
The drivers door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
Push the LOCK button on the key fob.
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
3. If any doors are open, close them. Alarm.
To Disarm The System When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
the following methods: The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
Push the UNLOCK button on the key fob. vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
handle (if equipped, refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
Passive Entry in Things To Know Before Starting Your door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle for further information). Vehicle Security Alarm.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi- If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
tion. becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
Passive Entry, push the Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm
Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid key fob in the Vehicle Security Alarm.
the vehicle).
Tamper Alert The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the 2
position.
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. NOTE:
Security System Manual Override The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome
doors using the manual door lock plunger. ON position (extreme top position).
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
ILLUMINATED ENTRY dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position (ex-
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob treme bottom position).
to unlock the doors or open any door or liftgate.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to Mirrors in Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further
information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY PASSIVE ENTRY To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, Push and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
open the liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis- once to unlock the drivers door or twice within five
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal
key fob with key fob. The key fob does not need to be lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. illuminated entry system will also turn on.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry in Things To
for all key fobs. Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa-
tion.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the drivers door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the key fob. To change the
current setting, refer to Uconnect Settings in Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel for further informa-
tion.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
Key Fob With RKE
the current setting, refer to Uconnect Settings in turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument
information. Panel for further information.
2
Headlight Illumination On Approach Using The Panic Alarm
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The the button on the key fob for at least one second and
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the
setting, refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding interior lights will turn on.
Your Instrument Panel for further information. The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate turn it off by either pushing the button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h) or
Push and release the LOCK button on the key fob to
greater.
lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry in Things To in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa- is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
tion. remain on.
Sound Horn With Lock You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Programming Additional Key Fobs 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
dealer.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Emergency Key Removal

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal rubbing alcohol. 2
during removal.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
Separating Key Fob Case
tion.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on users authority to operate the equipment.
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Battery at an acceptable charge level
System not disabled from previous remote start event
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
Vehicle Security Alarm not active
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of Ignition in OFF position
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: WARNING!
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans- Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
mission to be equipped with Remote Start. confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
reduce this range. or death when inhaled.
How To Use Remote Start Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
All of the following conditions must be met before the controls could cause serious injury or death.
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will appear in the Instrument
Doors closed
Cluster Display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
Hood closed remote start prematurely if equipped with Remote Start:
Liftgate closed Remote Start Aborted Door Open
HAZARD switch off Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted L/Gate Open The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset
tion must be cycled to the RUN position before you can
2
The message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
ON/RUN position.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
To Enter Remote Start Mode Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
Push and release the REMOTE START button on allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
the key fob twice within five seconds. The ve-
hicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button
Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
NOTE:
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
UNLOCK button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then,
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
Remote Start mode. the ignition START/STOP button.
For security, power window and power sunroof opera- NOTE: The message Push Start Button will appear in the
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Instrument Cluster Display until you push the ignition
Remote Start mode. START/STOP button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
When Remote Start is activated, the driver heated seat
users authority to operate the equipment.
feature will automatically turn on in cold weather. This
feature will stay on through the duration of Remote Start or DOOR LOCKS
until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN posi-
tion. Manual Door Locks
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation. upward.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
tion.
Manual Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door. ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child 2
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the could operate power windows, other controls, or
liftgate. move the vehicle.
WARNING! Power Door Locks

For personal security and safety in the event of a A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel.
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in Power Door Lock Switch Location
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Auto Unlock On Exit
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to Key- The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
less Enter-N-Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your power door locks if:
Vehicle for further information.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
If you push the power door lock switch, with the ignition
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and any front door is 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
3. The transmission is in PARK.
Turning off the ignition or closing the door will allow the
locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the 4. Any vehicle door is opened.
ON/RUN or ACC position, a chime will sound as a
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
reminder to remove the key fob.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Door Locks If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. To change the current setting, refer to Uconnect Settings
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further
the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto information.
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
authorized dealer per written request of the customer. in accordance with local laws.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Child-Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child- 2
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside
door handle even though the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll down the 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
window, and open the door with the outside door NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
handle. system, always test the door from the inside to make
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock certain it is in the desired position.
System
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
1. Open the rear door. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the cles Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of
child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position. Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument 2
Panel for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining
on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity
can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Drivers Side: Grabbing The Door Handle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the NOTE: If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all
drivers door handle, grab the drivers front door handle to doors will unlock when you grab hold of the drivers front
unlock the drivers door automatically. The interior door door handle. To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press, refer to
Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument
Panel for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati-
cally.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the To Enter The Liftgate:
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
drivers door unlock preference setting (Unlock Driver
liftgate, push the button underneath the left side of the
Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press).
accent bar, which is located on the liftgate below the glass,
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key to lock or unlock the vehicle.
Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have
been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the
vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the
vehicles Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs are
detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn
three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and
the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicles Doors:
With one of the vehicles Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push 2
the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
handle button. This could unlock the door(s). If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle remains
active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob WINDOWS
battery is dead.
Power Windows
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob The window controls on the drivers door trim panel
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicles control all of the door windows.
interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
tion.
Power Window Switches
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved There are single window controls on each passenger door
by the party responsible for compliance could void the trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
users authority to operate the equipment. The window controls will operate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power To stop the window from going all the way down during
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening 2
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Under- On some models, the driver and front passenger power
standing Your Instrument Panel for further information. window switches have an Auto-up feature. Pull the win-
dow switch up to the second detent, release, and the
WARNING! window will go up automatically.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not To stop the window from going all the way up during the
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of To close the window part way, pull the window switch up
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the to the first detent and release it when you want the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat- window to stop.
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches. NOTE:
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Auto-Down Feature
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
The drivers power window switch has an Auto-down to close the window.
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
release, and the window will go down automatically.
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
To open the window part way, push the window switch to closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
the first detent and release it when you want the window detent and hold to close window manually.
to stop.
position). To enable the window controls, push and release
WARNING!
the window lockout button again (setting it in the up
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is position).
almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the win-
dow path before closing the window. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury.
Reset AUTO-Up
Should the AUTO-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset AUTO-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second Window Lockout Switch
detent to open the window completely and continue to Wind Buffeting
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
after the window is fully open.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Window Lockout Switch Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
The window lockout switch on the drivers door trim panel down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
allows you to disable the window control on the rear partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
release the window lockout button (setting it in the down windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs NOTE:
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
minimize the buffeting. 2
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the
LIFTGATE liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pushing the UN- trim panel.
LOCK or LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry key
fob, the Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) LOCK/ If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
UNLOCK button underneath the left side of the accent bar, liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power
which is located on the liftgate below the glass or by liftgate functionality.
activating the power door lock switch located on either
front door trim panel.
Refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go in Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle for further information on Keyless
Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry).
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with the
manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or the
door lock cylinder on the drivers door.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and pull
the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and support
the liftgate in the open position.
Liftgate Release
NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it Important Safety Precautions
may be necessary to assist the props when opening the Some of the safety features described in this section may be
liftgate in cold weather. standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
WARNING! rized dealer.
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes could It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
injure you and your passengers. Keep the liftgate keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
blower switch on the climate control is set at high 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
are the restraint systems. restraint (Refer to Child Restraints).
Occupant Restraint Systems Features 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
Seat Belt Systems belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints) should be
secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
Supplemental Active Head Restraints not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
Child Restraints seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
WARNING!
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an 2
child restraint to make sure that you are using it air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
properly. cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul- restraint.
der belts properly. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved with a rear seat.
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room Seat Belt Systems
to inflate.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu- far away from home or on your own street.
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Cus- worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
tomer Center. Phone numbers are provided under If vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
You Need Assistance. risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert If Equipped BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
Front Seat BeltAlert
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
Initial Indication
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first to buckle their seat belts.
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
Change Of Status
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat led again.
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
seat is unoccupied.
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
WARNING!
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more 2
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat- your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
ing BeltAlert. collisions, the air bags wont deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
Lap/Shoulder Belts vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
lap/shoulder belts. these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very killed.
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
being thrown out of the vehicle. driver, should always wear their seat belt whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

position to minimize the risk of severe injury or A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
death in the event of a crash. not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the buckle nearest you.
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
Two people should never be belted into a single seat forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
belt. People belted together can crash into one an- your seat belt snugly.
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
person, no matter what their size. vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces wont be at internal injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
as low as possible and keep it snug. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a you from injury during a collision. You are more
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
is flat against your body, without twists. If you cant wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your are meant to be used together.
authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat 2
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat. Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull any slack in the shoulder belt
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt. 2
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the Adjustable Upper Anchorage
latch plate.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the that it is locked in position.
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is Seat Belt Extender
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
into position. only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
WARNING! it must be removed.
Miss-adjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. Position the WARNING!
shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
any slack in the shoulder belt. when worn, the distance between the front edge of
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer occupants body is LESS than 6 inches.
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt 2
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts bag must be replaced immediately.
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
Energy Management Feature If Equipped
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
wearing a seat belt. agement feature in the outboard front seating positions and
in the outboard rear seating positions (if equipped with
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and outboard rear seat Energy Management feature) that may
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) If If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
Equipped and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor occupants mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to Installing Child Restraints belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints
section of this manual. The table below defines the type of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pants mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
feature for each seating position.
until you hear a click.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
Third Row Shown If Equipped
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

younger, including a child in a rear-facing child The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
restraint. 2
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle ture or any other seat belt function is not working
with a rear seat. properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. crease the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
the entire seat belt is extracted.
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat restraints that have a harness for restraining the
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. child.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it These head restraints are passive, deployable components,
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily iden-
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock- tified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
ing mode. the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupants head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts. Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not 1 Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However if 2 Seatback
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the 3 Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
(Continued)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event Some of the safety features described in this section may be
of a collision. standard equipment on some models, or may be optional 2
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD rized dealer.
players. These items may interfere with the opera- Air Bag System Components
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
system components:
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Air Bag Warning Light
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint Steering Wheel and Column
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
Instrument Panel
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed. Knee Impact Bolsters
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
positioning the head restraint, refer to Adjusting Active
Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags and lap/
shoulder belt for both the driver and front passenger. The
air bags are supplemental to the seat belt restraint systems. Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
The drivers Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
center of the steering wheel. The passengers Advanced 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above 3 Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG or
AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an vanced Front Air Bags.
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can 2
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
restraint. inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle seat position.
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag Features
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter- a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which inflate.
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
equipped) or other system components. or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an the air bags and you could be injured because the air
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy bags may no longer be functional. The protective
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
output is used for more severe collisions. only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
(Continued)
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
collisions, air bags wont deploy at all. Always wear non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
Front Air Bag Operation of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
the driver and front passenger.
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub- Knee Impact Bolsters
stantial vehicle damage for example, some pole colli-
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial WARNING!
deceleration.
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over bolsters in any way.
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
deployed. radios, etc.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the 2
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIR-
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
BAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatbacks trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or
AIRBAG. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
and its deployment path are located should remain
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete free from any obstructions. 2
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
certain rollover or side impact events. the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the
during the four to eight seconds when the ignition roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
eight-second interval. the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or vehicle for any reason.
remains on while driving.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
Reference the Air Bag Warning Light topic in Supple- activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
mental Restraint System (SRS) for further information. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
WARNING! side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supple-
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
mental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
have deployed.
Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
covering above the side windows where the SABIC system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
(Continued)
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Occupants, including children, who are up against or Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured ment could cause you to be severely injured or
or killed. killed.
Occupants, including children, should never lean on Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
or sleep against the door, side windows, or area more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
infant or child restraint. some collisions, Side Air Bags wont deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are Side Air Bags.
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit Side Impacts
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
that is appropriate for the size of the child. determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
WARNING!
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
of the seat. right Side Air Bags only.
(Continued)
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, If A Deployment Occurs
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger deployment. 2
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
deploy. collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
Rollover Events
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover or all of the following may occur:
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro- The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
Side Air Bags should have deployed. rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may quickly. However, if you havent healed significantly
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten- doctor immediately.
sioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing
event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretension- process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
ers, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event. eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, Enhanced Accident Response System
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, In the event of an impact, if the communication network
follow the garment manufacturers instructions for remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
cleaning. on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will the following functions:
not be in place to protect you. Cut off fuel to the engine.
WARNING! Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat button.
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System the battery has power.
serviced as well. Unlock the power door locks.
NOTE: Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment. In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
authorized dealer immediately. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart- Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
the engine. initial startup.
2
Air Bag Warning Light The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
connecting wiring associated with air bag system
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
electrical components.
bag system immediately.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
the ON/RUN position.
OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is
not on and the air bags will not inflate. The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
becomes disconnected prior to deployment. remains on while driving.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn- the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning immediately.

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
panel could mean you wont have the air bags to system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag not function properly if modifications are made.
system immediately. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
Maintaining Your Air Bag System cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
WARNING! attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be system for persons with disabilities, contact your
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect authorized dealer.
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the Event Data Recorder (EDR)
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
side steps or running boards. deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicles systems performed.
(Continued)
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as 2
designed to record such data as: law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
EDR.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
Child Restraints
were buckled/fastened;
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel- times, including babies and children.
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
How fast the vehicle was traveling. province, requires that small children ride in proper re-
These data can help provide a better understanding of straint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. for ignoring it.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are seats rather than in the front.
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
WARNING!
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold the vehicle where you will use it.
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
NOTE:
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper or call 1-866-732-8243.
restraint for the childs size.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canadas
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owners 53.htm
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owners Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Recommended Type Of Child Re-

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age 2
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
younger and who have not reached ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
the height or weight limits of their in the rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
old or who have out-grown the a five-point Harness, facing forward
height or weight limit of their rear- in the rear seat of the vehicle
facing child restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
are too small to properly fit the vehi- seat of the vehicle
cles seat belt
Children Too Large for Child Re- Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
straints who have out-grown the height or seat of the vehicle
weight limit of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach with a rear seat.
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. WARNING!
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
is recommended for children from birth until they reach leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers child may be more severely injured as a result.
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Older Children And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant 2
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con- or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
for children who are over two years old or who have the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their when installing an infant or child restraint.
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
child seat. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
All children whose weight or height is above the forward- adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
booster seat until the vehicles seat belts fit properly. If the the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
cushion while the childs back is against the seatback, they the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the personal injury.
seat belt.
Integrated Child Booster Seat If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each out-
board second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 inches (119 cm) and 57 inches
(145 cm) tall.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to use
the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child Release Loop
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
use.
booster seat position.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
Booster Seat Proper Belt Use

4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back firmly 8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
against the seatback. the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the childs lap.
WARNING!
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on Securely lock the seat cushion into position before
the hips and as snug as possible. using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. injury or death.
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the childs shoulder be-
WARNING!
tween their neck and arm?
In a severe collision, the booster seat may be damaged
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer and
childs thighs and not their stomach?
possibly replaced before it is used again. The inte-
grated booster seat must be replaced following a colli- 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
sion that meets any of the following criteria:
If the answer to any of these questions was no, then the
The vehicle cannot be driven away from the scene. child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
The vehicle door nearest the seat has been damaged. child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
At least one occupant was injured in the crash. periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
At least one air bag in the vehicle deployed in the A childs squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
crash. position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
Children Too Large For Booster Seats move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over WARNING!
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicles seat arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
belt alone: will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
vehicle seat?
2. Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the front of the
vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back?
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Recommended Type Of Child

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age 2
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
younger and who have not reached ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
the height or weight limits of their in the rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
old or who have out-grown the a five-point Harness, facing forward
height or weight limit of their rear- in the rear seat of the vehicle
facing child restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
are too small to properly fit the vehi- seat of the vehicle
cles seat belt
Children Too Large for Child Re- Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
straints who have out-grown the height or seat of the vehicle
weight limit of their booster seat
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
Restraint System anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations (Third Row Shown
cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether If Equipped)
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor- Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without seating position
using the vehicles seat belts. Some seating positions may have
a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH 2

What is the weight limit (childs 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child re- until the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH anchor- child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
age system to attach the child re- (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
straint? anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the No Do not use the seat belt when you
seat belt be used together to attach a use the LATCH anchorage system to
rear-facing or forward-facing child attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
restraint? child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached No Never share a LATCH anchorage
using a common lower LATCH an- with two or more child restraints. If
chorage? the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back of
touch the back of the front passenger the front passenger seat if the child
seat? restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint
Owners Manual for more informa-
tion.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes 5 Passenger Vehicle: All second row
head restraints are removable.
7 Passenger Vehicle: All second and
third row head restraints are remov-
able.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages Tether Anchorages (Second Row 60/40)

Locating Tether Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
There are tether strap anchorages behind each Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
second row seating position, located on the back anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
of the seat, near the floor.
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and
E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver
(3). Anchorages B and C are used for the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a LATCH-
compatible position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you are installing three child
restraints, you must use the seat belt to install the center Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
child restraint. You can use either the LATCH anchors for anchorages in this vehicle:
positions (1) and (3) or the vehicles seat belt for installing
the child seats in the outboard positions. 1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restrain an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating
position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, B and C.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite
door, A. Do not use the remaining right outboard for installing the child seats in the outboard posi-
tions. Please refer to Installing the LATCH- 2
seating position (1) for any occupant. The center child
restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position. Compatible Child Restraint System for typical in-
stallation instructions.
WARNING! Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
Use anchorages B and C to install a LATCH- facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
compatible child restraint in the center seating posi- restraint systems will be installed as described here.
tion (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
A child restraint installed in the center position (2) Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty right following the instructions below. See the section Installing
outboard seating position (1). Do not use this seat for Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what
another occupant. type of seat belt each seating position has.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
than one child restraint. tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
If you are installing three child restraints next to each attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether ages.
anchor for the center position. You can then use
either the LATCH anchors or the vehicles seat belt 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
(Continued) may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
allow more room for the child seat. child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the childs reach.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
position.
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
top tether anchorage. See the section Installing Child all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc- that they should not play with them.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
WARNING!
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in Improper installation of a child restraint to the
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur- LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
ers instructions. straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
direction. only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
Seat Belt other items or equipment to the vehicle.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Belt Restraints In This Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are 2
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip.
The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by
pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then
letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is
locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the
webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the
Automatic Locking Mode description under Occupant
Restraints for additional information on ALR.
Third Row Shown If Equipped
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
= Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (childs Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint? child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al-
seat? lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints should only be
removed by qualified technicians. If
any of the head restraints require re-
moval, see your authorized dealer.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt seating position with an ALR retrac-
path of the child restraint? tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
child seat.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do strap. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a 2
tether anchor.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
click. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
against the child seat.
direction.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in Plate (CINCH) If Equipped:
the Automatic Locking mode. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap position to make room for the child seat. You may also
portion around the child restraint while you push the move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle child seat.
seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
click. belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
portion around the child restraint while you push the
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
seat.
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the complete the installation of the child restraint.
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the
strap. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using
buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into
the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a
the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
tether anchor.
installation tight, try a different seating position.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
Anchorage
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
WARNING!
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
(Continued)
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) 2
Restraint System for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Seat Track Release Lever

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
available.>
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturers instructions.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting (Second Row Captains While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
Chair Anchorage Shown) limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
WARNING! mental and should be avoided.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
increased head motion and possible injury to the high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be- should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
tether strap. mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to Mainte-
nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. 2
in the engine or damage may result.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its using a seat belt properly.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This On seven passenger models, do not drive the vehicle
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not with the second row passenger seat in the easy
interpreted as a problem. entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped upward and
seat moved forward), as this position is only in-
SAFETY TIPS tended for entering and exiting the third row seats.
Transporting Passengers Failure to follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen-
AREA. ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
WARNING! could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously
or even fatally injured.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may Exhaust Gas
cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, WARNING!
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
injured or killed. monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
(Continued) (Continued)
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even- haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow or oil change. Replace as required.
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
confined areas any longer than needed to move your Seat Belts
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con- if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
blower at high speed. retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the Air Bag Warning Light
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system. The light should turn on and remain on for four
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust to six seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is during starting, or if the light stays on, flickers,
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete or turns on while driving, have the system checked by an
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- authorized dealer.
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. 2
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
able.
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an addi-
Floor Mat Safety Information tional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
vehicle.
ONLY use the drivers side floor mat on the drivers
WARNING! side floor area. To check for interference, with the
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor trunk.
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
ONLY use the passengers side floor mat on the
passengers side floor area. Tires
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
the drivers side floor area when the vehicle is patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera- lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
vehicle control. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference Lights
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re- exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the panel.
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch Door Latches
pedals then re-install the floor mats. Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
Fluid Leaks
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
by lightly pulling mat. fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Inside Day/Night Mirror If Equipped . . . . . .89 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped . . . . .89
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
UCONNECT PHONE (RADIO 8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . .111
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped. . . . . . . . .91
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Manual Folding Mirrors If Equipped . . . . . . .92
Uconnect Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Heated Mirrors If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped . . . . .93
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
UCONNECT PHONE (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Radio 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
VOICE COMMAND (RADIO 8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . .141
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Radio 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Uconnect Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Uconnect Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Drivers Power Seat If Equipped . . . . . . . . .149 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Power Lumbar If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Front Heated Seats If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .151 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Fog Lights If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Drivers Seat Height Adjustment If Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped . .154
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Third Row Passenger Seats Seven Passenger
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats . . . . . .159
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models . . .164 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . .172
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . .166 Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .184
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .185
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . . .175 ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .185
3
HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED . .176 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Interior Observation Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped . . . . . . . .190
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED . . . .190
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .191
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . .193
ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .194
ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .184
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .197 Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Opening Sunroof Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Center Console Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Opening Sunroof Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .198 Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Closing Sunroof Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers
Closing Sunroof Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . .198
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . . .210
Venting Sunroof Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .216
POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .203
Power Inverter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped
Inside Day/Night Mirror If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center 3
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
on the view through the rear window.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night on the view through the rear window.
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
vehicles behind you.
windshield).
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view
viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect
Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for
further information.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
Automatic Dimming Mirror
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
CAUTION! side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. the passenger side convex mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean. Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door
trim panel.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Folding Mirrors If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be- 3
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
Power Mirror Switches

Models Without Express Window Feature
Push the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then push one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models With Express Window Feature
Push and release the mirror select button marked L (left) or
R (right) and then push one of the four arrow buttons to
move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. The Power Folding Mirror Switch
selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in order to NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
guard against accidentally changing a mirror position (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
following an adjustment.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed Manual Folding Mirrors If Equipped
is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
automatically unfold. hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: for-
ward, rearward and normal.
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs: Heated Mirrors If Equipped
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to Rear Win-
dow Features in Understanding The Features Of Your
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Vehicle for further information.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the UCONNECT PHONE (4.3)
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light. Radio 4.3 3
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
Hands Free dialing via Voice (Call John Smith Mobile
or, Dial 248-555-1212)
Redialing last dialed numbers (Redial)
Calling Back the last incoming call number (Call Back)
Illuminated Vanity Mirror View Call logs on screen (Show incoming calls, Show
Sun Visor Slide-On Rod Feature If Equipped Outgoing calls, Show missed Calls, Show Recent
Calls)
This feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning
the visor to block out the sun. Searching Contacts phone number (Search for John
Smith Mobile)
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
Screen Activated Features: If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features.
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen
Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manu-
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- facturer for details.
played on the touchscreen
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen vehicle and enables you to mute the systems microphone
for private conversation.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs
Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the WARNING!
touchscreen
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
connect to them quickly including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
Your mobile phones audio is transmitted through your should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
vehicles audio system; the system will automatically mute Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone. serious injury or death.
For Uconnect Customer Support: The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
Hands-Free Profile mobile phone. Uconnect features
U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
855-8400.
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call, out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French). no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicles Uconnect Phone. Operation
The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used structure. Voice commands are required after most
with the system at a time. The system is available in Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods 3
English, Spanish, or French languages. for how Voice Command works:
Uconnect Phone Button 1. Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo-
The Uconnect Phone Button is used to enter bile.
the phone mode and make calls, show recent,
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook
guide you to complete the task.
etc., When you press the button you will hear
a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command. You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
The Uconnect Voice Command Button is beep, which follows the Listen prompt or another
only used for barge in and when you are prompt.
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call. For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying Call and then
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles John Smith and then mobile, the following com-
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be pound command can be said: Call John Smith mobile.
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so For each feature explanation in this section, only the
equipped. compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for it. The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
For example, you can use the compound command form requires more information from the user it will ask a
voice command Search for John Smith, or you can question to which the user can respond without pushing
break the compound command form into two voice the Voice Command button on your steering wheel.
commands: Search Contact and when asked John
Voice Command Tree
Smith. Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if Refer to Voice Tree in this section.
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away Help Command
from you.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
Natural Speech know your options at any prompt, say Help following
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan- the beep.
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in Phone button on your steering wheel and say a
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out command or say help. All Uconnect Phone sessions
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as ah and begin with a push of the Phone button on the radio
eh. The system handles fill-in words such as I would control head.
like to. Cancel Command
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Cancel and
sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith. you will be returned to the main menu.
For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the You can also push the Phone or Voice Command
associated follow-up prompt such as Who do you want to button on your steering wheel when the system is
call? in the case where a phone call was requested but the listening for a command and be returned to the main or
specific name was not recognized. previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone select Yes you will go the Paired Phones screen, if you
select No you will return to the Uconnect Phone main
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
menu.
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference 2. At the Paired Phones screen press the Add Device
3
button on the touchscreen and a pop-up with instruc-
your mobile phone Owners Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing. tions will appear.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
NOTE:
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, select the
You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to Uconnect device and enter the PIN.
complete this procedure.
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
The vehicle must be in PARK. the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this
1. You can do either of the following:
phone the highest priority. This phone will take prece-
a. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, page dence over other paired phones within range.
down to the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touch-
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
screen, press it and you will see the Paired Phones
screen. If there are no paired phones you will see 1. Push the PLAYER button on the faceplate to begin.
<Empty> as the first device name.
2. Press the Source button on the touchscreen.
b. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
the Phone button on the touchscreen and you will
go to the Uconnect Phone main screen. Press the 4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
Settings button on the touchscreen. If there are no
phones currently paired a pop-up will appear. If you
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled 1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
Audio Device. When prompted on the device, select the
2. Press the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect device and enter the PIN.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the Phone/
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
Audio button on the touchscreen and then an Audio
the system is connecting.
Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the Connect De-
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
vice button on the touchscreen.
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make this
device the highest priority. This device will take prece- 5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
dence over other paired devices within range.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
will have the higher priority. 2. Press the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touchscreen.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up a 3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
list of paired audio devices.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the Disconnect
Show Paired Audio Devices. Device button on the touchscreen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio 5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Device
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. 1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device 2. Press the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touchscreen.
follow these steps:
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device. To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the Delete Device
Reference section.
button on the touchscreen.
Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. 3
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
2. Press the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touchscreen.
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the the Uconnect Phone.
currently connected device.
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the Make Favorite loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button on the touchscreen; you will see the chosen downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
device move to the top of the list. the previously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
5. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
phone is accessible.
Transfer From Mobile Phone) If Equipped
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
names) and number entries from the mobile phones
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
tion.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
Emergency And Towing Assistance Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
be deleted or the names can not be changed. with Uconnect Phone.
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps. Redial
1. Press the Phonebook button on the touchscreen from Dial by pressing in the number
the Phone main screen.
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by
2. Press the 911/Help button on the touchscreen. Press Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
the appropriate listing to alter, Emergency for example.
Mobile Phonebook
3. Once Emergency is pressed, the Edit button on the
Recent Call Log
touchscreen appears. Press the Edit button on the
touchscreen and you will be given the choice to Edit NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
Number or Reset to Default. done with one call or less active.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task. Dial By Saying A Number
Phone Call Features 1. Push the Phone button to begin.
The following features can be accessed through the 2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep,
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your say Dial 248-555-1212.
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be ac- 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
cessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Push the Phone button on your steering wheel to 1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen.
begin.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep, 3
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
say Call John Doe Mobile.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreen to enter
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
the number and press Call.
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe. To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the Voice Command button while in a call and say
Call Controls
1234# or you can say Send Voicemail Password if
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phone-
features: book.
Answer Recent Calls
End You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
Ignore
Incoming Calls
Hold/unhold
Outgoing Calls
Mute/unmute
Missed Calls
Transfer the call to/from the phone
All Calls
Swap two active calls
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls button
Join two active calls together on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the Phone button and say Show NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
calls will be displayed. when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing,
Recent or Missed. Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call
Currently In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command button and say Dial or
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Call followed by the phone number or phonebook
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or Ignore.
while the second call is in progress. Or you can place a
Press the Answer button on the touchscreen or push the
call on hold by pressing the Hold button on the
Phone button on the steering wheel to accept the call.
touchscreen, then dial a number from the dialpad,
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call recent calls or from the phonebooks. To go back to the
Currently In Progress first call, refer to Toggling Between Calls in this
If a call is currently in progress and you have another section. To combine two calls, refer to Join Calls in this
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for section.
call waiting that you normally hear when using your Toggling Between Calls
mobile phone. Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
push the Phone button until you hear a single beep,
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Push the Phone
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
button to place the current call on hold and answer
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
the incoming call.
time. Also you can press the Swap button on the
touchscreen, on the Phone main screen.
Join Calls After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends, or until
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call
hold), press the Join Calls button on the Phone main
on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
mobile phone. 3
Call Termination
Uconnect Phone Features
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End
button on the touchscreen or the Phone button. Only Emergency Assistance
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active reachable:
call is terminated by the far end, a call on hold may not
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
become active automatically. This is cell phone-
number for your area.
dependent.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
Redial
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
1. Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or push follows:
the Phone button and after the Listening prompt
and the following beep, say Redial. Push the Phone button to begin.
2. The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was After the Listening prompt and the following beep,
dialed from your mobile phone. say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
Call Continuation This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Mexico.
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE: NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
(1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC 24-Hour Road-
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
side Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Informa-
area.
tion Booklet and on the 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
Voice Mail Calling
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly. To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to Working
with Automated Systems.
WARNING! Working With Automated Systems
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the This method is used in instances where one generally has
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has navigating through an automated telephone system.
network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect
Phone. You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance automated customer service line. Some services require
immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
Push the Phone button to begin.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
After the Listening prompt and the following beep, normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
say Roadside Assistance or say Towing Assistance. your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the touchscreen
or push the Voice Command button and say the word
Send then the sequence you wish to enter. For ex- NOTE:
ample, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
The first number encountered for that contact will be
pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
button and say, Send 3 7 4 6 #. Saying Send
ignored.
followed by a number, or sequence of numbers, is also 3
to be used for navigating through an automated cus- You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
tomer service center menu structure, and to leave a network configurations. This is normal.
number on a pager.
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as out settings that are too short and may not allow the use
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager of this feature.
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
book entry and/or Last Name as Voice Password, then if
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These
you push the Voice Command button and say Send
additional symbols will be ignored when dialing a
Voicemail Password, the Uconnect Phone will then
numbered sequence.
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
Barge In Overriding Prompts Phone And Network Status Indicators
The Voice Command button can be used when you Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice your phone and network status when you are attempting
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The status is
asking There are two numbers with the name John. Say given for network signal strength and phone battery
the full name you could push the Voice Command strength.
button and say, John Smith to select that option
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
Voice Response Length keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
Voice Response Length. and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a
number with your connected Bluetooth mobile phone, the
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press the
audio will be played through your vehicles audio system.
Settings button on the touchscreen.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
2. Press the Display button on the touchscreen, then number using voice a command.
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
3. Select either Brief or Detailed by pressing the box dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
indicate your selection. after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF) Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able Phone And Mobile Phone
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
Uconnect Phone simply press the Mute button on the phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions 3
Phone main screen. described in your mobile phone Users Manual.
Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred Voice Command
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without For best performance:
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least inch (1
connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone main
the mirror.
screen.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during
a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under: Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
Low-to-medium blower setting
not similar.
Low-to-medium vehicle speed
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. 800 must be
Low road noise spoken eight-zero-zero not eight hundred.
Smooth road surface You can say O (letter O) for 0 (zero).
Fully closed windows Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing num-
Dry weather condition
ber combinations may not be supported.
NOTE:
Far End Audio Performance
Even though the system is designed for users speaking Audio quality is maximized under:
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some. Low-to-medium blower setting
When navigating through an automated system such as Low-to-medium vehicle speed
voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of Low road noise
speaking the digit string, make sure to say Send.
Smooth road surface
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not
in motion is recommended. Fully closed windows
It is not recommended to store similar sounding names Dry weather conditions
in the Uconnect Phonebook. Operation from the drivers seat
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Power-Up
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
the Uconnect Phone or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth
ON mode.
Voice Tree
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
You can replace John Smith with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say Send a General Information
message to John Smith and the system will ask you This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 3
which phone number you want to send a message to for 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
John Smith. ing conditions:
You can replace Mobile with Home, Work or Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
Other. party responsible for compliance could void the users
You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls authority to operate the equipment.
or Missed Calls. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system This device must accept any interference received, in-
is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
supports messaging over Bluetooth. tion.
You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone. UCONNECT PHONE (RADIO 8.4/8.4 NAV)
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
You can replace 4 with any message number shown on
communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to
the screen.
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth than these commands
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
the phonebook.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features: Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Voice Activated Features:
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Hands Free dialing via Voice (Call John Smith Mobile
or, Dial 248 555 1212). Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
SMS messages.
Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the
Hands Free text messaging (Send a message to John touchscreen.
Smith Mobile).
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access to
Redialing last dialed numbers (Redial). connect to them quickly.
Calling Back the last incoming call number (Call NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Back). Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly. Your
mobile phones audio is transmitted through your vehicles
View Call logs on screen (Show incoming calls, Show
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
Outgoing calls, Show missed Calls, Show Recent
radio when using the Uconnect Phone. For Uconnect
Calls).
customer support, visit the following website:
Searching Contacts phone number (Search for John
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
Smith Mobile).
855-8400.
Screen Activated Features
Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
played on the touchscreen. system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the systems microphone Uconnect Phone Button
for private conversation.
The Uconnect Phone button is used to enter
the phone mode and make calls, show recent
WARNING! incoming and outgoing calls, view phonebook
3
Any voice commanded system should be used only in along with other features. When you push the
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws, button you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to
including laws regarding phone use. Your attention give a command.
should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Uconnect Voice Command Button
Failure to do so may result in an accident causing
serious injury or death. The Uconnect Voice Command button is
only used for barge in and when you are
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth already in a call and you want to send Tones or
Hands-Free Profile mobile phone. Uconnect features make another call.
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
The Voice Command button is also used to access the
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works
features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the
no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
to use the Voice Command button.
on and has been paired to the vehicles Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles
The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used
the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
with the system at a time. The system is available in
equipped.
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Operation say each part of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound command form
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
voice command Search for John Smith, or you can
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu
break the compound command form into two voice
structure. Voice commands are required after most
commands: Search Contact and when asked John
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
Smith. Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
for how Voice Command works:
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
1. Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo- speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
bile. from you.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to Natural Speech
guide you to complete the task.
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
You will be prompted for a specific command and then guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
guided through the available options.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
beep, which follows the Listen prompt or another certain non-word utterances and sounds such as ah and
prompt. eh. The system handles fill-in words such as I would
like to.
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying Call and then The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
John Smith and then mobile, the following com- sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith.
pound command can be said: Call John Smith mobile. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
associated follow-up prompt such as Who do you want to
compound command form of the voice command is
call? in the case where a phone call was requested but the
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
requires more information from the user it will ask a To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
question to which the user can respond without pushing compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
the Voice Command button on your steering wheel.
NOTE: 3
Voice Command Tree
You must have Bluetooth enabled on your mobile phone
Refer to Voice Tree in this section.
to complete this procedure.
Help Command
The vehicle must be in PARK.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say Help following To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
the beep. your mobile phone Owners Manual. The Uconnect web-
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone button on your steering wheel and say a 1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen to begin.
command or say help. All Uconnect Phone sessions 2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
begin with a push of the Phone button on the radio system, a pop-up will appear.
control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Cancel and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the Phone or Voice Command
button on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while
Mobile Phone Pairing

3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name 5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen. the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
If No is selected, press the Settings button from this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
the Uconnect Phone main screen. this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen. precedence over other paired phones within range.
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled Pair Additional Mobile Phones
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the
name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen. 1. Press the Settings button from the Phone main screen.
See step 4 to complete the process. 2. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled 3. Press the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen to
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the 3
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range. 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was 7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
priority. this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
precedence over other paired devices within range.
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
Show Paired Phones
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
Connect My Phone paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Player button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up a 3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
list of paired audio devices: device name.
Show Paired Phones 4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
Connect My Phone 5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the touch-
screen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device After Pairing 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range.
If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device 1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.
follow these steps: 2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio Devices
1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen. button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Sources 3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
button on the touchscreen. device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than
the currently connected device.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular
Audio Device. 4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. 5. Press the Delete Device button on the touchscreen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices
button on the touchscreen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices example, after you start the vehicle.
button on the touchscreen. 3
A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to
device name. the Uconnect Phone.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed. Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
5. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.
the previously downloaded phonebook is available for
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. use.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Transfer From Mobile Phone) If Equipped phone is accessible.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or de-
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text leted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited
names) and number entries from the mobile phones on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connec-
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect tion.
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite
Phonebook. 3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite, the Phonebook screen, select the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then select the + button on the
press and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone
main screen. touchscreen located to the right of the phonebook re-
cord. Select an empty entry and press the + on that
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phonebook selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears, press
from the Phone main screen, then select the appropriate Add from Mobile. You will then be asked which
number. Press the + next to the selected number to contact and number to choose from your mobile phone-
display the options pop-up. In the pop-up select Add book. When complete the new favorite will be shown.
to Favorites.
Add From Mobile

Phonebook Favorites
To Remove A Favorite Emergency And Towing Assistance
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the Phone The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
main screen. can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names
cannot be changed.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and 3
then press the + Options button on the touchscreen. To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
3. Press the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove. 1. Press the Phonebook button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen. Scroll
to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and
Towing Assistance Favorites.
3. Press the + Options button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
Remove From Favorites

4. The Options pop-up will display, press Remove from
Favs.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance Recent Call Log
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
SMS Message Viewer
between Editing the number or resetting the number to
default. Dial By Saying A Number
Phone Call Features 1. Push the Phone button to begin,
The following features can be accessed through the 2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep,
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and sup- say Dial 248-555-1212,
ported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 248-555-1212.
calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the
features that you have.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Mute/unmute
1. Push the Phone button on your steering wheel to Transfer the call to/from the phone
begin.
Swap two active calls
2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep, 3
Join two active calls together
say Call John Doe Mobile.
Touch-Tone Number Entry
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will 1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen.
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
Call Controls
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features: 4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to enter
the number and press Call.
Answer
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
End the Voice Command button on your steering wheel
while in a call and say Send 1234# or you can say
Ignore
Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is
Hold/unhold stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls You can also push the Phone button and say Show
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming
following call types: calls will be displayed.
You can also push the Phone button and say Show
my recent calls from any screen and the All calls screen
will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing,
Recent or Missed.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel to accept
the call. You can also press the answer button on the
Recent Calls touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
Incoming Calls
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call
Outgoing Calls Currently In Progress
Missed Calls If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
All Calls
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
These can be accessed by pressing the recent calls button mobile phone. Push the Phone button on the steering
on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
wheel, or press the answer button on the touchscreen, You can also push the Phone button to toggle between
or caller ID box, to place the current call on hold and the active and held phone call.
answer the incoming call.
Join Calls
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the When two calls are in progress (one active and one on 3
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call hold), press the Join Calls button on the Phone main
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Call Termination
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress To end a call in progress, momentarily push the Phone
button or press the end button on the touchscreen.
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
To go back to the first call, refer to Toggling Between Redial
Calls in this section. To combine two calls, refer to Join Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or push the
Calls in this section. Phone button and after the Listening prompt and
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold the following beep, say Redial.
During an active call, press the Hold button on the The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
Phone main screen. dialed from your mobile phone.
Toggling Between Calls Call Continuation
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
press the Swap button on the Phone main screen. Only Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
one call can be placed on hold at a time. switched to OFF.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio NOTE:
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
Bluetooth connection. It is recommended to press the
touchscreen.
transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle. The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Uconnect Phone Features
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
Emergency Assistance not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable: The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of
successfully making a phone call as to that for the
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
mobile phone directly.
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is WARNING!
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows: Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in
1. Push the Phone button to begin. emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep, network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect
say Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will Phone.
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
automated customer service line. Some services require
1. Push the Phone button to begin. immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone. 3
2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep,
say Roadside Assistance or say Towing Assistance. When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the touchscreen
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
or push the Voice Command button and say the word
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico
Send then the sequence you wish to enter. For ex-
City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in
ample, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC 24-Hour Road-
pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command
side Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Informa-
button and say, Send 3 7 4 6 #. Saying Send
tion Booklet and in the Owners Information Manual on
followed by a number, or sequence of numbers, is also
the DVD under Other References.
to be used for navigating through an automated cus-
Voice Mail Calling tomer service center menu structure, and to leave a
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to Working number on a pager.
with Automated Systems. You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
Working With Automated Systems tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
This method is used in instances where one generally has book entry with First and/or Last Name as Voicemail
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while Password, then if you push the Voice Command but-
navigating through an automated telephone system. ton and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect
Phone will then send the corresponding phone number button and say, John Smith to select that option
associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
phone.
Voice Response Length
NOTE: It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed
The first number encountered for that contact will be Voice Response Length.
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be 1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.
ignored.
2. Press the Voice button on the touchscreen, then scroll
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone down to Voice Response Length.
network configurations. This is normal.
3. Select either Brief or Detailed by pressing the box
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
out settings that are too short and may not allow the use indicate your selection.
of this feature.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of
additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a your phone and network status when you are attempting
numbered sequence. to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The status is
given for network signal strength and phone battery
Barge In Overriding Prompts strength.
The Voice Command button can be used when you Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
asking There are two numbers with the name John. Say keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing via
the full name you could push the Voice Command the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution
and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
number with your connected Bluetooth mobile phone, the versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone main
audio will be played through your vehicles audio system. screen.
The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect
number using voice a command. 3
Phone And Mobile Phone
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that described in your mobile phone Users Manual.
the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
audio. Phone
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) Voice Command
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be able For the best performance:
to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least inch (1
the other party will not be able to hear you. To mute the cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and
Uconnect Phone simply press the Mute button on the
the mirror.
Phone main screen.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred you.
from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a Even though the system is designed for many languages
voice command period. and accents, the system may not always work for some.
Performance is maximized under: NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
Low Road Noise O (letter O) for 0 (zero).
Smooth Road Surface Even though international dialing for most number com-
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
Fully Closed Windows
combinations may not be supported.
Dry Weather Condition
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Far End Audio Performance Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a
large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Audio quality is maximized under:
Uconnect Phone.
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed 3
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Low Road Noise In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
Smooth Road Surface compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Fully Closed Windows
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
Dry Weather Conditions
phone.
Operation From The Drivers Seat
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth to use this
feature. If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is
not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the
Messaging button will be grayed out and the feature will
not be available for use.
Voice Text List Voice Text Reply

NOTE: Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the Once a message is received and viewed or listened to, you
vehicle is not moving. will have the following options:
Read Messages: Send a Reply
If you receive a new text message while your phone is Forward
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
Call
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Send Messages Using Buttons On The Touchscreen: 4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message sent.
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
new message: 5. Press Send or Cancel.
1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen. Send Messages Using Voice Commands: 3
2. Press the messaging button on the touchscreen then 1. Push the Phone button.
New Message.
2. After the Listening prompt and the following beep,
3. Press one of the 18 preset messages and the person you say Send message to John Smith mobile.
wish to send the message to.
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
List. There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pushing the Voice Command
button and saying the message you want to send.
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
Preset Message List

List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I cant talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. Ill call you later.
7. Im on my way.
Preset Message List 8. Thanks.

9. Ill be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late. Bluetooth Communication Link
11. See you in <number> minutes. Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
12. Stuck in traffic. generally be re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in 3
13. Start without me.
Bluetooth ON mode.
14. Where are you?
Power-Up
15. Are you there yet?
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON
16. I need directions. or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
17. Im lost. at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
18. See you later.

Voice Tree
NOTE: 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only
the first number encountered in a contact name will be
1. You can replace John Smith with any name in your
sent. For example if there is a number stored in the
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say Send
Home and Work numbers for the contact Voicemail
a message to John Smith and the system will ask you
password only the Home number will be sent. 3
which phone number you want to send a message to for
John Smith. 8. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
call log download over Bluetooth then these commands
2. You can replace Mobile with Home, Work or
will return a response that the contact does not exist in
Other.
the phonebook.
3. You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
Calls or Missed Calls.
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
4. You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number Call Emergency and Call Towing Assistance will
supported by your Mobile phone. call the corresponding number stored with those con-
tacts.
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button on the NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted while and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
the VR session is active.
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available while
a call is active. This is an example that uses a Phonebook
Record named Voicemail Password.
NOTE: 5. You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone.
1. You can replace John Smith with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say Send 6. You can replace 4 with any message number shown
a message to John Smith and the system will ask you on the screen.
3
which phone number you want to send a message to for
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download or
John Smith.
call log download over Bluetooth then these commands
2. You can replace Mobile with Home, Work or will return a response that the contact does not exist in
Other. the phonebook.
3. You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing
Calls or Missed Calls.
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system
is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone
supports messaging over Bluetooth.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face

and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
General Information VOICE COMMAND (RADIO 8.4/8.4 NAV)
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Radio 8.4/8.4 NAV
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows 3
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio,
disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and SiriusXM
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
Travel Link.
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation. NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command system
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice
NOTE:
Command system to recognize user voice commands may
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex- level.
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the users authority to operate the WARNING!
device.
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
The term IC before the certification/registration number safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica- including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
tions were met. should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
When you push the Uconnect Voice Command button,

you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two The system will best recognize your speech if the windows
responses: are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is set to low.
I didnt understand At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
I didnt get that, etc.
To hear available commands, push the Uconnect Voice
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system will Command button and say Help. You will hear
respond with an error and give some direction as what can available commands for the screen displayed.
be said based on the context you are in. After three
consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session Natural Speech
will end. Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
Pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button while phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
the system is speaking is known as barging in. The certain non-word utterances and sounds such as ah and
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can say eh. The system handles fill-in words such as I would
a command. This will become helpful once you start to like to.
learn the options. The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words Cancel or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith.
Help. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the
system identifies the topic or context and provides the
These commands are universal and can be used from any
associated follow-up prompt such as Who do you want to
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
call? in the case where a phone call was requested but the
the active application.
specific name was not recognized.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a
normal speaking volume.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
requires more information from the user it will ask a Radio/Player Modes
question to which the user can respond without pressing In this mode, you can say the following commands:
the Uconnect Voice Command button.
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when a 3
Uconnect Voice Commands
call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Com-
The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two mand button.
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
Source
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active. To switch to the audio source, say Change source to Disc
for example. This command can be given in any mode or
Start a dialogue by pushing the Uconnect Voice Command
screen:
button.
Track (#) (to change the track)
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command but-
ton.
2. Say a command (e.g., Help).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume set-
ting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Voice Tree
NOTE: You can replace 8 with any other satellite channel

number received by the radio.
You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as 98.7 FM. You can replace rock with any of the satellite music
types.
You can replace 80s on 8 with any other satellite
station name received by the radio. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
NOTE: Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only

available when the iPod is connected and playing.
You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
names on the current device that is playing. based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when CD Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
is playing. shaded grey.
NOTE: Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top

25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams.
You can replace NFL with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say Show You can also say Show Current Weather or Show
MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines. extended weather or Show five day forecast or
Show ski info to get other forecasts.
You can replace Headlines with any menu items shown
on a league screen. For example you can say Show NFL Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
NOTE: Navigation commands only work if equipped with

Navigation.
Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
You can replace Player with Radio, Navigation,
shaded grey.
Phone, Climate, More or Settings.
NOTE: Auto Services, Hospitals, Parking, Airport,

Police Stations, Fire Stations, or Auto Dealers.
You can also say Find City, Find Favorite, Find
Play by Category, Find Play by Name, Find Re- Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
cently Found, Where to? or Go Home. shaded grey.
You can say Find Nearest then Restaurant, Fuel,
Transit, Lodging, Shopping, Bank, Entertain-
ment, Recreation, Attractions, Community,
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING! 3
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more Power Seat Switch
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
Drivers Power Seat If Equipped the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down, Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat. The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
CAUTION!
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat cushion its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
when the desired position is reached. is stopped by an obstruction in the seats path.
Power Lumbar If Equipped

WARNING!
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. of the drivers seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the
control which could cause a collision and serious lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the
injury or death.
switch will raise or lower the position of the support.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change 3
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 min-
utes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
Power Lumbar Switch
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
Front Heated Seats If Equipped seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
The front heated seats control buttons are located within This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control system. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen. Your Instrument Panel for further information.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting ON.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious Manual Seat Adjustment
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat. seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired
position has been reached. Then, using body pressure,
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and seat adjusters have latched.
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
floor.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious 3
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. Seatback Release
To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean
WARNING!
back to the desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
the upright position. cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
(Continued)
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
only when the vehicle is parked. seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor surface
(allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the
Drivers Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a hard-
back surface that you can use as a work surface when the
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard side
seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion.
of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the lever
to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approximately 2.15
inches (55 mm).
Fold-Flat Seat
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the seat.
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat of a crash.
cushion will return to its normal shape. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the 3
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
WARNING! restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan- collision.
gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while the Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
vehicle is parked. Front Seats
Supplemental Active Head Restraints are passive, deploy-
Head Restraints
able components, and vehicles with this equipment can not
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by be readily identified by any markings, only through visual
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
head restraint is located above the top of your ear. trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
WARNING!
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper- between the back of the occupants head and the AHR. This
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
restraints are placed in their proper positions in injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts. Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To
(Continued) Know Before Starting for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
downward on the head restraint. head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in 3
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted) Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
NOTE: struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
head restraints require removal, see your authorized during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
dealer. could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, straint is deployed.
refer to Occupant Restraints/Supplemental Active
Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head Re- Head Restraints Second Row Seats
straints (AHR) in Things To Know Before Starting for The second row seats are equipped with adjustable and
further information. removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the base of the head To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment and the
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. release buttons while pulling upward on the whole assem-
bly and raise it up as far as it can go. To reinstall the
headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while
pushing the release buttons. Then adjust it to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to

1 Release Button Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start-
2 Adjustment Button ing.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu- death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
head restraints in a location outside the occupant never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
compartment.
Third Row Passenger Seats Seven Passenger NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
Models make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily.
These head restraints are non-adjustable and non-
removable. However, you can fold them forward when
they are not in use by passengers. Refer to 50/50 Split WARNING! 3
Third-Row Passenger Seats With Fold-Flat Feature It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Seven Passenger Models for further information. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
WARNING! injured or killed.
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
without having the head restraint unfolded and locked vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
in place. Failure to follow this warning may result in Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
personal injury to the passenger in the event of a using a seat belt properly.
collision. On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen-
ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously
To provide additional storage area, each second-row pas- or even fatally injured.
senger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some seating room if
needed.
To Fold The Seat
WARNING!
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
the seat. To prevent personal injury or damage to objects, keep
your head, arms, and objects out of the folding path of
the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.

NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
Seatback Release
WARNING!
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure. Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
lever.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
WARNING!
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift the
lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dan-
lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then, using gerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause
body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted 3
be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. properly and you could be injured. Adjust any seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once the
seatback is in the upright position.
Manual Seat Adjustment

be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback/Armrest Second Row Passenger Seat

The latch release-loop is located at the top of the seatback/
armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to release the latch
and then downward to lower the seatback/armrest.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. Seatback/Armrest
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not in
use, or when additional seating area is required.
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
WARNING!
seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be certain cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its
that the seatback/armrest is locked securely into posi- tracks.
tion. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper 3
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Stadium Tip n Slide (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) Seven

Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the seat
to allow for full seat travel.
Tip n Slide Control Lever
To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and then
continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until it
locks in place.
Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Tip n Slide Seat
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked se-
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry curely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not pro-
and exit from the third-row passenger seats. vide the proper stability for child seats and/or passen-
gers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious
WARNING! injury.
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this position, 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
as it is only intended for entering and exiting the third Fold-Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result in To provide additional storage area, each third-row passen-
personal injury. ger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room if
needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seatback, NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
make sure the second-row passenger seatback is not in a ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
reclined position. This will allow the seatback to fold easily. an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
To Fold The Seatback
cushion will return to its normal shape. 3
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the seatback
upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and release To Unfold The Seatback
the release-loop. Then, continue to push the seatback Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
forward. The head restraints will fold automatically as the toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the
seatback moves forward. seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to
lock it in place.
Seatback Release
Assist Strap
The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position. To TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the Two latches must be released to open the hood.
seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and release
the release-loop. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of a collision.
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
Hood Release
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever near
the center of the grille between the grille and hood
opening. Push the safety latch lever to the left and then
raise the hood.
3
Hood Prop Rod
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
Underhood Safety Latch vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
3. Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
on the underside of the hood. injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod is
fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm down-
ward push at the center front edge of the hood to
ensure that both latches engage. Never drive your
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the parking lights and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instru- parking light and instrument panel light operation.
ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
headlight switch out of the AUTO position. while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the head-
lights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
the headlight switch is turned off.
will come on in the automatic mode.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of 3
Headlights On With Wipers
turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition switch
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to the Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect Settings Cus-
Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features in tomer Programmable Features in Understanding Your
Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor- Instrument Panel for further information.
mation.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first time
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain ON unless
the parking brake is applied. Upon returning to the PARK
position, the DRLs will turn OFF. DRLs will turn OFF when
the ignition is switched OFF.
NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect System, refer to Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features in Understanding
Your Instrument Panel for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
Fog Light Switch
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the drivers door is opened. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
Fog Lights If Equipped
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam
headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever NOTE:
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
column. moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is 3
defective.
A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display and a continuous chime will
sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Multifunction Lever Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
Turn Signals headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Flash-To-Pass WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This the left side of the steering column.
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the
LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were
switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
The Battery Protection also includes the glove compart-
ment light. To restore interior light operation after auto-
matic battery protection is enabled (Lights OFF), either
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
light switch. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
Map/Reading Lights at the end of the lever. For information on using the rear
window wiper/washer, refer to Rear Window Features
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.
overhead console. Refer to Overhead Console in Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further infor- Intermittent Wiper System
mation. Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If
wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five detents the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
to select the desired delay interval. times will be doubled.
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Front Wiper Control

There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds be-
tween cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h). At
speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay varies
from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum
of approximately 18 seconds between cycles. Front Wiper Control
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the park Windshield Washers
position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while they are To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
operating. The wipers will resume operation when you located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the
turn the ignition switch back to the ON position. second detent.
CAUTION! If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the
delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for two
Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind- resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the
any position other than OFF.
OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three wipe
In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
cycles and then turn OFF.
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch is
left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield, WARNING!
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
vehicle is restarted. lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
park position. If the windshield wiper control is with the defroster before and during windshield
turned OFF, and the blades cannot return to the washer use.
park position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Mist Feature TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunc- This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
tion lever, inward to the first detent to activate a single or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering 3
until you release the lever. column.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features in
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor-
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
mation.
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel out-
ward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
fully engaged. the heating element ON.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second
WARNING! time to turn the heating element OFF.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- wheel to operate.
ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
injury or death. remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument
HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED Panel for further information.
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering WARNING!
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
95 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
the steering wheel is already warm.
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
The heated steering wheel control button is located within burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control for long periods.
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
(Continued)
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may 3
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
right side of the steering wheel.
1 ON/OFF 3 SET -
2 RES + 4 CANCEL
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic

Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same
time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System
can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set
speed.
To Activate To Deactivate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the Instrument Cluster Display will illuminate. To turn the button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without eras-
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be ing the set speed from memory.
turned off when not in use. Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch
OFF erases the set speed from memory.
WARNING!
To Resume Speed
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
lose control and have an accident. Always leave the 20 mph (32 km/h).
system OFF when you are not using it. To Vary The Speed Setting
To Set A Desired Speed To Increase Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the To Decrease Speed
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under- When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease
standing Your Instrument Panel for more information. speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): The drivers preferred units can be selected through the 3
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to Under-
U.S. Speed (mph) standing Your Instrument Panel for more information.
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
results in an increase of 1 mph. U.S. Speed (mph)
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
continue to increase until the button is released, then the decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
new set speed will be established. results in a decrease of 1 mph.
Metric Speed (km/h) If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button new set speed will be established.
results in an increase of 1 km/h. Metric Speed (km/h)
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
continue to increase until the button is released, then the decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
new set speed will be established. results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense System Usage
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the Precautions in this section for limitations of this system
vehicle set speed. and recommendations.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
moderate hills is normal. changed to the ON/RUN position.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Con- REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
trol. position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
WARNING! above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the 6 mph (9 km/h).
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle
could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ParkSense Sensors ParkSense Display
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within turn ON indicating the system status.
the sensors field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches 3
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System.
Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your
Instrument Panel for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Instru-
ment Cluster Display. It provides visual warnings to indi- Park Assist Ready
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in
Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor-
mation.
Park Assist System Off Slow Tone

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the Instrument
Cluster Display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Fast Tone Continuous Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 79-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) (200-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2- Slow Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow
(Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor-
mation. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect
System. The available choices are: Off, Sound Only, or the system is disabled, the Instrument Cluster Display will
show the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as
Sound and Display. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa- long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
tion. Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense button is pushed to disable the During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
system, the Instrument Cluster Display will show the Assist system has detected a fault condition, the Instru-
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approximately ment Cluster Display will actuate a single chime, once per
five seconds. Refer to Instrument Cluster Display in ignition cycle, and it will display the CLEAN PARK
ASSIST, SERVICE PARK ASSIST, or SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM message. Refer to Instrument Cluster ParkSense System Usage Precautions
Display in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for
NOTE:
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition, Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
the Instrument Cluster Display will show the CLEAN dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating 3
PARK ASSIST, SERVICE PARK ASSIST, OR SERVICE properly.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM messages for as long as the vehicle
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
affect the performance of ParkSense.
operate.
When you turn ParkSense off, the Instrument Cluster
If CLEAN PARK ASSIST appears in the Instrument
Display will read PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF. Fur-
Cluster Display make sure the outer surface and the
thermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
key.
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an autho-
rized dealer. When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
If SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE PARK ASSIST position and ParkSense is turned off, the Instrument
SYSTEM appears in the Instrument Cluster Display, see Cluster Display will show the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
an authorized dealer. OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch Failure to do so can result in the system not working
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
sensors.
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper. not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12 rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
a sensor problem, causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
SYSTEM message to appear in the Instrument Cluster is behind the vehicle.
Display.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
proximity.
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
ParkSense.
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
(Continued)
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
EQUIPPED or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image while a dashed center-line will indicate the center of the
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear 3
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones that
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
check entire surroundings across the top of the screen.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings in Under-
License plate.
standing Your Instrument Panel for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
the vehicle.
appears again.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
each zone:
and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
WARNING!
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror and
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always an optional power sunroof switch.
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven Overhead Console
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in Courtesy/Reading Lights
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The lights
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder turn on when a front door, a rear door or the liftgate is
when using ParkView. opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
button on the key fob is pushed. The courtesy lights also
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
function as reading lights. Push in on each lens to turn
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
these lights on while inside the vehicle. Push the lens a
second time to turn each light off. You may adjust the
direction of these lights by pushing the outside ring, which
is identified with four directional arrows.
3
Sunglasses Storage Compartment

Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the driver
and front seat passenger a wide field of view to conve-
Courtesy/Reading Light
niently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats.
Sunglasses Storage To use the interior observation mirror, push on the raised
To access the storage compartment, push on the raised bars bars on the compartment door and release (the door will
on the compartment door in the center of the console and swing downward), then raise the door until it is almost
release and the door will swing downward. closed and release. The door will latch in position to use the
interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the observation mirror position, the door
can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED
closed and then opened by pushing the latch again to HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held
release. transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security sys-
tems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicles
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
Observation Mirror
Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped
Refer to Power Sunroof in Understanding the Features
Of Your Vehicle for further information.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles

To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
3
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Programming A Rolling Code
Alarm is active. For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995:
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
These garage door openers can be identified by the
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging
before you begin programming.
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission button that is normally used to open and close the door.
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new The name and color of the button may vary by manufac-
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device turer.
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the LEARN or TRAINING button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the LEARN or TRAINING button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
Training The Garage Door Opener blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
1 Door Opener LEARN/TRAIN mode.
2 Training Button
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
activates, programming is complete.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
mitter button.
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat 3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
channels. mitter button.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then 3
Code)
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
follow these steps:
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. rapid.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not observe the indicator light.
release the button. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program- is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
steps. To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
Programming A Non-Rolling Code erase the channels.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
before 1995:
(Non-Rolling Code)
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) follow these steps:
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
release the button. while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program- 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
ming A Non-Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remain- you push and release (cycle) your hand-held trans-
ing steps. mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to time-out after 4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
several seconds of transmission:
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals open and close while you are programming.
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian observe the indicator light.
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in NOTE:
the same manner.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
or gate motor.
To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Security
programming, plug it back in at this time. It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button your vehicle.
(Canadian/Gate Operator) To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 3
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, seconds until the red indicator flashes.
follow these steps:
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. cannot be erased.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
release the button. Troubleshooting Tips
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming step 2 and are some of the most common solutions:
follow all remaining steps.
Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
Using HomeLink held transmitter.
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed complete the training for a Rolling Code.
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
member to plug it back in?
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call General Information
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
serious injury or death. tion.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close NOTE:
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
that has a stop and reverse feature as required by ance could void the users authority to operate the
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage device.
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not The term IC before the certification/registration number
use a garage door opener without these safety fea- only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet tions were met.
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
visors on the overhead console. ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun- 3
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
Opening Sunroof Express
WARNING! Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with and stop when the full open position is reached. This is
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key called Express Open. During Express Open operation,
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle sunroof.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof Manual Mode Pinch Protect Feature
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
Sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at full sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
open position. Any release of the switch will stop the in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is curs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
pushed again. Close.
Closing Sunroof Express Venting Sunroof Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half Push and release the Vent button within one half second
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of
cally. This is called Express Close. During Express Close sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
Closing Sunroof Manual Mode
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward. sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at full
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
open.
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting POWER OUTLETS
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in the center
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. console below the radio. The power outlet has power
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows available when the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or position. 3
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
Front 12 Volt Power Outlet
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
will cancel this feature. lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not hold
the lighter in the heating position.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel for further information.
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back of
the center console storage area. Power is available with the the center console. This power outlet has power available
ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK position. when the ignition is in the LOCK, ON or ACC position.
Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
CAUTION!
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has
power available when the ignition is in the ON or ACC Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
position. Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will 3
need to be replaced.
The power outlet on the bottom of the center console
shares the fuse with the power outlet on the back of
the console. The combined usage must not exceed
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet

NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and
element must be used.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicles battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicles battery will discharge suffi-
Power Outlet Fuses
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
1 F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power Outlet engine from starting.
Console Rear Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
2 F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
WARNING! After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
To avoid serious injury or death:
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
recharge the vehicles battery.
Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. 3
POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power outlet located on the back of the center
console. This outlet can power mobile phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools. Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually
press the power inverter button OFF and ON. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electri-
cal devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power Vehicles Equipped With Radio 8.4/8.4 NAV
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt maxi- To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
mum) power rating is exceeded.
1. Press the Controls button on the touchscreen.
WARNING! 2. Press the Outlet button on the touchscreen to turn the
To avoid serious injury or death: power inverter On or Off.
Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
CUPHOLDERS
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands. There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
Close the lid when not in use. console, for the front passengers.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter Operation

The power inverter is turned On and Off using the
Uconnect System.
Vehicles Equipped With Radio 4.3
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the More button on the faceplate (located next to
the Uconnect display).
2. Press the Outlet button on the touchscreen (located on Floor Console Cupholders
the Uconnect display) to turn the power inverter On or
Off.
For passengers in the second row there are two cupholders,
located in the center armrest between the two seats.
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the
back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can be
3
adjusted to better position the cupholders.
Door Bottle Holder
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
Armrest Cupholders
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
door trim panels.
STORAGE Floor Console Storage
Glove Compartment An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor
console.
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to open the
glove compartment.
Floor Console Cubby Bin
Glove Compartment
Center Console Storage
There is a storage tray and storage compartment located
under the center console armrest.
3
Center Console Storage Tray

The storage tray can be slid forward and rearward or
removed to access the center console storage compartment.
Center Console
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the lid, to gain access to the storage tray and storage
compartment.
Sliding Armrest
The center console armrest can also slide rearward for easy
access to the storage area.
Center Console Storage Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart- Sliding Armrest
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
WARNING!
sion.
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If
WARNING!
Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback. position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then forward not provide the proper stability for passengers. An 3
to open the seat to the detent position. improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury.
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers

If Equipped
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located on
the back of the drivers seatback.
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment

NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers

In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner The liner can be removed for easy cleaning.
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat.
Each 1.6 gal (5.9L) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35L) cans,
plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner allows for
easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if equipped).
Pull the door latch release-loop upward to release the latch
and then forward to open the bin door.
Removable Liner
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Management System
Five Passenger System Features
A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
storage bin.
A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
In-Floor Storage
60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to
Seats in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve- Seats in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle for further information. hicle for further information.
3
An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature, An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to Seats which extends cargo space even further. Refer to Seats
in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for
further information. further information.
Cargo tie-downs. Cargo tie-downs.
A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped). Cargo Tie-Downs
Seven Passenger System Features
WARNING!
A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
seats. tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose.
60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer to provided for child seat tethers.
Seats in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle for further information. Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle.
Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or
behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dan-
gerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only,
Cargo Tie-Downs not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat
belts.
WARNING!
Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) Five
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can Passenger Models
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve- secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
hicle: protect passengers from loose cargo.
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
on the label attached to the left door or left door center cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
pillar.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place. side of the vehicle.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the cover
3
use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attachment posts
make more room in the cargo area. (on both ends of the cover) into the notches in the trim
panels. Lower the cover to position the posts into the
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the flat
bottom of the notches and release the handle.
side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either the
left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the ends of
the cover housing) into the left attachment point or the
right attachment point (shown).
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover

WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
cause injury in a collision. It could become airborne
during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover
from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not
store it in the vehicle.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rear Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position
left side of the steering column. for rear wiper operation.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
position to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Upon release, the wiper will cycle three times before
returning to the set position.
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the ON
position.
In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper switch 3
and allow the rear wiper to return to the park
position before turning off the engine. If the rear
wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper freezes to
the window, damage to the rear wiper motor may
occur when the vehicle is restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
the blade cannot return to the park position, damage
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to
to the rear wiper motor may occur.
the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return to
the Park position. When the vehicle is restarted, the Rear Window Defroster
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Push this button to turn on
CAUTION!
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
(Continued) minutes.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED
window defroster only when the engine is operating. The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to carry
cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and
CAUTION! it should be distributed uniformly over the cross rails. In
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to addition, the roof rack does not increase the total load
the heating elements: carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof rack does not
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a NOTE: The roof rack side rails on your vehicle are NOT
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat- designed to carry a load without the addition of crossbars.
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water. Metal crossbars are offered by MOPAR accessories to
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive provide a functional roof rack system. See your authorized
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win- dealer.
dow. To Move The Crossbars
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each crossbar approximately
six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the side rail.
4. Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is locked
in position.
NOTE:
To help control wind noise when installing the crossbars, 3
make sure the arrows marked on the underside of the
crossbars face the front of the vehicle.
To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
crossbars are not in use, fasten the front crossbar in the
fourth position from the front and the rear crossbar in
the eighth position. The tie down holes on the crossbar
ends should always be used to tie down the load. Check
Crossbar Knobs the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
2. Relocate the crossbars, aligning the crossbar stanchions securely attached.
(end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on the
outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning. WARNING!
There are four frontward marks for the front crossbar
and four rearward marks for the rear crossbar. Make Cargo must be securely tied before driving your ve-
sure the crossbars remain equally spaced or parallel at hicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
any position for proper function. particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
3. Tighten the knobs on each crossbar to lock it in position. when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
As you tighten the knob, make sure the clamp tooth
engages completely into the side rail slot.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, cially true on large flat loads and may result in
place a blanket or other protective layer between the damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
load and the roof surface.
Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel
at any roof rack position for proper function. Non-
compliance could result in damage to the roof rack,
cargo, and vehicle.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .222 Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . .225 Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .248
Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Turn Menu OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Green Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message
Electrical Load Reduction Actions . . . . . . . . . . .248
White Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .243
Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Instrument Cluster Display Location and
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Customer Programmable Features Radio 4.3
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Customer Programmable Features Radio 8.4
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA VIDEO VES Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) IF
Replacing The Headphone Batteries . . . . . . . . . .287
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . .296
Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . . . .283 Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
VES Remote Control If Equipped . . . . . . . . .284
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries . . . . . . .286
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .297
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Automatic Three Zone Temperature Control (ATC)
With Touchscreen If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .307
Manual Three Zone Climate Controls With
Touchscreen If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 Side Window Demist Outlet 6 Switch Bank 11 Engine Start/Stop Button

2 Air Outlet 7 Uconnect Hard Controls 12 Hood Release Lever
3 Instrument Cluster 8 SD Memory Card Slot 13 Dimmer Controls
4 Uconnect System 9 Power Outlet 14 Headlight Switch
5 Glove Compartment 10 CD/DVD Slot 15 USB/AUX Port
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Premium Instrument Cluster

1. Tachometer The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
(RPM x 1000). grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
2. Instrument Cluster Display operating range.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Instrument Cluster Display messages. Refer CAUTION!
to Instrument Cluster Display in Understanding
Your Instrument Panel for further information. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads H
3. Speedometer pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
Indicates vehicle speed. air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
4. Fuel Gauge into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
H, turn the engine off immediately and call an
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
authorized dealer for service.
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the side WARNING!
of the vehicle where the fuel door is located. A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
5. Temperature Gauge others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem- coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi- service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
cates that the engine cooling system is operating under the hood yourself, see Maintaining Your Ve-
satisfactorily. hicle. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated message equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications
are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor- 4
mation contained in the Owners Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion.
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the drivers seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle for further information.
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
United States If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system mal-
function or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until

Light
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump
Canada will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
4
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has repair to the ABS system is required.
dropped below a specified level.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
fluid level checked. have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
WARNING! applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
What It Means
Light
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until
the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with se- 4
vere usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission
into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase the engine
speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Battery Charge Warning Light

Light
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related compo-
nent.
If jump starting is required, refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergen-
cies.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob- 4
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light If Equipped
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to
Power Steering in Starting And Operating for further information.
Door Open Warning Light If Equipped
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 4
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING! CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. Immediate service is required.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light If Equipped
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light If Equipped 4
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to main-
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair im- tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
mediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
your authorized dealership as soon as possible. tire pressure telltale.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles
handling and stopping ability.
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
CAUTION!
approximately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, have been established for the tire size equipped on
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for damage may result when using replacement equip- 4
a variety of reasons, including the installation of re- ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
TPMS to continue to function properly. rized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the ben-
efits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on un-
til fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low. 4
Wait To Start Light If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Wait To Start Light
The Wait To Start telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is
turned to the RUN position. Its duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions.
Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed. Refer to Starting Procedures
in Starting and Operating for further information.
NOTE: The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is
warm enough.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn 4
signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the
multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to Electronic Speed Con-
trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
What It Means
Light
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, flash to
pass scenario.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Instrument Cluster
Display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and the key
removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and 4
display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your
Instrument Cluster Display is designed to display impor-
tant information about your vehicles systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your Instrument Cluster Display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they arent. The steering wheel mounted controls allow Instrument Cluster Display
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
submenus. You can access the specific information you information by pushing the switches mounted on the
want and make selections and adjustments. steering wheel. The menu items consists of the following:
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls Radio Info
The Instrument Cluster Display features a driver- Fuel Economy
interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Vehicle Speed
Trip Info
Tire Pressure
Vehicle Information
Messages DOWN Arrow Button
Turn Menu OFF Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
The system allows the driver to select information by scroll downward through the main menus and
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering submenus.
wheel: RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button for
access to main menus or submenus. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset features.
BACK Button
Push and release the BACK button to scroll back
to a previous menu.
Oil Change Due

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
cator system. The Oil Change Due message will appear
UP Arrow Button in the Instrument Cluster Display for 5 seconds after a
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
upward through the main menus and submenus. change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Average Fuel Economy
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
Distance To Empty (DTE)
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the UP
arrow button. To reset the oil change indicator sys- Instantaneous Fuel Economy
tem (after performing the scheduled maintenance), per-
Average Fuel Economy
form the following procedure:
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When 4
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read RESET or
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history informa-
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
tion will be erased, and the averaging will continue from
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times the last fuel average reading before the reset.
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the igni-
tion to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the In-
strument Cluster Display and push the RIGHT ar- Fuel Economy
row button. The following Fuel Economy functions will
display in the Instrument Cluster Display:
Distance To Empty (DTE) Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the This display shows the instantaneous MPG or L/ 100 km in
fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is bar graph form while driving. This will monitor the gas
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous mileage in real-time as you drive and can be used to
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT
Vehicle Speed
arrow button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the Instru-
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
ment Cluster Display. Push the RIGHT arrow button
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
to display the current speed in MPH or km/h. Pushing
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated the RIGHT arrow button a second time will toggle
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a LOW the unit of measure between MPH or km/h.
FUEL message. This display will continue until the ve- NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed
hicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel menu will not change the unit of measure in the Instrument
to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and Cluster Display.
a new DTE value will display.
Trip Info The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
until Trip Info displays highlighted in the Instrument Trip A
Cluster Display and push the RIGHT arrow button.
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button with Trip Info
reset.
highlighted will cause the Instrument Cluster Display to 4
show Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed Time all in one display. Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last
If you want to reset one of the three functions you use reset.
the UP or DOWN arrow button to highlight
(select) the feature that you want to reset. Pushing the Trip B
RIGHT arrow button will cause the selected feature Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
to reset individually. The three features can only be reset reset.
individually. The following Trip functions display in the
Instrument Cluster Display: Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Trip A
Elapsed Time
Trip B
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed Time Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button
once to clear the resettable function.
Tire Pressure Engine Hours
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
until Tire PSI: displays highlighted in the Instrument
Messages
Cluster Display. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
pressure value at each corner of the graphic. until Messages: XX displays highlighted in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display. If there is more than one message,
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
pushing the RIGHT arrow button will display a
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button stored warning message. Push and release the UP or
until Vehicle Info displays in the Instrument Cluster DOWN arrow button if there is more than one
Display and push the RIGHT arrow button. Push message to step through the remaining stored messages.
the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll through If there are no messages, pushing the RIGHT arrow
the available information displays. button will not change the display.
Coolant Temperature Turn Menu OFF
Displays the actual coolant temperature. Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN
Oil Temperature arrow button. Pushing the RIGHT arrow button
clears the menu display. Pushing any one of the four
Displays the actual oil temperature. Display control buttons will bring the menu back.
Oil Pressure If Equipped Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message
Displays the actual oil pressure. Electrical Load Reduction Actions
Transmission Temperature This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
Displays the actual transmission temperature. system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or If the Charging System Light is on it may indicate a
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical problem with the charging system. Refer to Charging
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving System Light in Understanding Your Instrument
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing Panel for further information.
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads. The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. and vehicle functions which can be effected by load 4
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery reduction:
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle. Heated/Cooled Cup Holders
When load reduction is activated, the message Battery Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
Saver On or Battery Saver Mode will appear in the
HVAC System
Instrument Cluster Display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state 115V AC Power Inverter System
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate Audio and Telematics System
that the charging system cannot sustain.
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
NOTE: following conditions:
The charging system is independent from load reduc- The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
charging system continuously. are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. What to do when an electrical load reduction action
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, message is present (Battery Saver On or Battery Saver
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports) Mode)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
During a trip:
frequent stopping).
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices. Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
parking periods).
Check the audio settings (volume)
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
After a trip:
(weeks, months).
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
completely.
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on Ignition Off Draw currents).
when the vehicle was parked.
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
The battery was used for an extended period with the and parking time).
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
consoles and similar devices.
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
CYBERSECURITY
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa- possible outcomes if your vehicles systems are
tion. This information allows systems and features in your breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
vehicle to function properly. including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may 4
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea- result in an accident involving serious injury or
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful death.
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com- software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
updates to improve the usability and performance of your breached.
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
unlawful access to your vehicle systems. ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your dealer immediately.
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE: UCONNECT SETTINGS
FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
software updates. touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
To help further improve vehicle security and minimize and change the customer programmable features.
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should: Buttons On The Faceplate
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software- Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
update to learn about available Uconnect software side of the Radio 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/
updates. Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate
Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). control knob to scroll through menus and change settings
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent. Buttons On The Touchscreen
For further information, refer to Onboard Diagnostic Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Radio
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity in Maintaining Your Touchscreen.
Vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can
result in damage to the touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features Radio 4.3 Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to access the
Settings Settings screen, use the Page Up/Page Down buttons
In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access on the touchscreen to scroll through the following settings.
programmable features that may be equipped such as Press the desired setting button on the touchscreen to
change the setting using the description shown on the
Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors
& Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass following pages for each setting.
4
Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth Setup through but-
tons on the faceplate and touchscreen.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Radio 4.3 Buttons On The Touchscreen
1 Radio 4.3 Buttons On The Faceplate

Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options

Brightness +
NOTE:
The Brightness setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and buttons on
the touchscreen.
Mode Day Night Auto
Language English Franais Espaol
NOTE:
When in the Language feature, you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the
trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped).
Units US Metric
Voice Response Brief Long
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Clock
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:

Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM 4
NOTE:
Within the Set Time and Format setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Show Time Status If On Off
Equipped
Sync Time If Equipped On Off
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Park Assist If Equipped Off Sound Only Sounds and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for, and the alert the driver of, objects behind the vehicle when the transmis-
sion gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
Hill Start Assist If On Off
Equipped
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the

Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the Headlight Off Delay feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.

Headlights With Wipers
If Equipped
Illuminated Approach 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
4
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto High Beams If On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
When the Automatic High Beam Headlamps is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate auto-
matically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
Steering Directed Lights On Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the Steering Directed Lights feature is selected, the headlights will turn relative to a change in direction of
the steering wheel.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the Auto Unlock On Exit feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the trans-
mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the drivers door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go) On Off
If Equipped

Remote Door Unlock Order Driver All
NOTE:
When Driver is selected, only the drivers door will unlock on the first push of the key fob UNLOCK button, you
must push the key fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passengers doors. When All is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob UNLOCK button. If All is programmed, all doors will unlock no 4
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver is programmed, only the drivers door will
unlock when the drivers door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the drivers door
opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use the key fob).
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available:

Auto-On Heated Seats Off Remote Start All Starts
If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the drivers heated seat will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40 F
(4.4 C).
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Engine Off Power 0 sec 45 sec 5 min 10 min
Delay
NOTE:
When the Engine Off Power Delay feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings button on the

Compass 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4
Variance
NOTE:
When the Compass Variance feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
Compass Yes
Calibration
NOTE:
Press Compass Calibration on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
Yes button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or me-
tallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
Compass Variance Zone Map

Setting Name Adjustable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.

Balance/Fade Up Arrow Down Ar- Left Arrow Right Ar- Center C
Button row Button Button row Button Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C Button 4
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Music Info Cleanup On Off
NOTE:
The Music Info Cleanup feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation.
Surround Sound If Equipped On Off
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touch-

Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement.
SIRIUS Setup
After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touch-

Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Customer Programmable Features Radio 8.4 When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
Settings screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
Press the More button on the touchscreen, then press the mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access programmable features that may be Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button 4
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/ settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on
Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup. the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the

Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With + -
Headlights ON
NOTE:
To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
Display Brightness With + -
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
Set Language
NOTE:
When the Set Language feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Franais / Espa-
ol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set
Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.

Units US Metric
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Touchscreen Beep
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster If Equipped 4
NOTE:
When the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the In-
strument Cluster Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Fuel Saver Display In Clus-
ter If Equipped
NOTE:
The Fuel Saver Display In Cluster feature turns the ECO message on and off in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.

Sync Time With GPS If Equipped
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be un-
checked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be un-
checked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar If Equipped
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touch-

Park Assist If Equipped Off Sound Only Sounds and Display 4
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for, and the alert the driver of, objects behind the vehicle when the transmis-
sion gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
ParkView Backup Camera
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of
the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear License plate.
Hill Start Assist If On Off
Equipped
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the

NOTE:
Headlights With
Wipers If
Equipped
Headlight Illumi- 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
nated On Approach
NOTE:
When the Headlight Illumination On Approach feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto Dim High
Beams If
Equipped

NOTE:
When the Auto Dim High Beams feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automati-
cally under certain conditions.
Daytime Running
Lights If 4
Equipped
Steering Directed
Headlights If
Equipped
NOTE:
The Steering Directed Headlights feature causes the headlights to turn relative to a change in direction of the steer-
ing wheel.
Flash Lights With
Lock
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the Auto Door Locks feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the drivers door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the drivers door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob UNLOCK button. You must press the key fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passengers
doors. When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the 4
key fob UNLOCK button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors, all doors will un-
lock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door
is programmed, only the drivers door will unlock when the drivers door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driv-
ers door opening. If Driver Door is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch
can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry If Equipped
NOTE:
The Passive Entry feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
LOCK or UNLOCK buttons.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Auto-On Driver Heated Off Remote Start All Starts
Seat With Vehicle Start
If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the drivers heated seat will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40 F
(4.4 C).
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the

Engine Off Power 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes 10 minutes 4
Delay
NOTE:
When the Engine Off Power Delay feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay + -
NOTE:
remain on after the engine is shut off. Press the + or - buttons to transition from 0 seconds to 30, 60, or 90 sec-
onds.
Compass Settings If Equipped NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the com-
pass variance zone should be set for best results.
After pressing the Compass Settings button on the
Compass Vari- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ance
NOTE:
When the Compass Variance feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
Perform Com- On
pass Calibra-
tion
NOTE:
Press Compass Calibration on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the On but-
ton on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). A
message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is
where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
Compass Variance Zone Map

Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.

Balance/Fade Up Arrow Down Ar- Left Arrow Right Ar- Center C
Button row Button Button row Button Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the Balance/Fade of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C Button
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Music Info Cleanup On Off
NOTE:
The Music Info Cleanup feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth button on the touch-

Paired Devices List of Paired Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owners Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup button on the touch-

Channel Skip List of Channels 4
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) IF EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES) is de-
signed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of stan-
dard video games or audio devices. Please review this
Owners Manual to become familiar with its features and
operation.
NOTE: Screen(s) are located in the back of the front seat
headrests.
Getting Started Overhead Video Screen
With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position, turn
Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume Control
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
knob.
overhead console behind the screen.
When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen NOTE: The VES system will retain the last setting when
turned off.
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES). Play Video Games
The Remote Control Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped) 4
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks) on
Play A DVD the rear of the center console enable the
1. Press the EJECT button on the radio faceplate (Touch- monitor to display video directly from a
screen). video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio directly from an MP3 player.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts 1. Video in (yellow).
playing the first track.
2. Left audio in (white).
3. Ensure the VES Remote Control and the Headphone
3. Right audio in (red).
switch is on Channel 1.
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
Using The Remote Control
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES jacks:
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles will ex-
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by ceed the power limit of the vehicles Power Inverter. Refer
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by to the Power Inverter section in your vehicles Owners
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN- Manual for more information.
TER on the Remote Control.
Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and Using The Remote Control
Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number.
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control and the
Using The Remote Control Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 2,
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN-
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the MODE
TER on the Remote Control.
button on the remote until the desired audio source
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls appears on the screen.
1. Press the MORE button on the touchscreen. Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
2. Press the Rear Entertainment button on the touch- 1. Press the MORE button on the touchscreen.
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
2. Press the Rear Entertainment button on the touch-
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
Power button on the touchscreen.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
4. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen for the Power button on the touchscreen.
channel desired and press the Source button on the
4. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen for the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A touchscreen to select the desired mode.
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System 2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push EN-
simultaneously.
TER.
In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
NOTE:
and right side equates to Channel 2.
The VES system will retain the last setting when turned 4
If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then Channel
off.
2 is for audio only.
Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
available in some regions or locations, the vehicle must
will display on the screen and the audio will be heard on
be stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
Channel 1 in the headphones.
position. Refer to local and state laws.
Audio can be heard through the headphones even when
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
the Video Screen is closed.
1. Press the MORE button on the touchscreen.
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
2. Press the Rear Entertainment button on the touch-
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts 3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
playing the first track. Power button on the touchscreen.
Using The Remote Control 4. Press the 1 or 2 button on the touchscreen for the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
VES Remote Control If Equipped 3. Light Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch Indicates which chan-
nel is being controlled by the remote control. When the
selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (right
side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the
Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. In radio modes, push to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
VES Remote Control
Controls And Indicators 6. / Prev In radio modes, push to select to the previous
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the start of the
1. Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone current or previous audio track or video chapter. In
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on. 7. MENU Push to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from the
2. Channel Selector Indicators When a button is pushed, Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
the currently affected channel or channel button is RANDOM for a CD).
illuminated momentarily.
8. / (Play/Pause) Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. (Stop) Stops disc play. 16. BACK When navigating in menu mode, push to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
10. PROG Up/Down When listening to a radio mode,
disc menu, the operation depends on the discs con-
pushing PROG Up selects the next preset and pushing
tents.
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
radio. 17. In radio modes, push to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast 4
11. MUTE Push to mute the headphone audio output for
rewind through the current audio track or video chap-
the selected channel.
ter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
12. SLOW Push to slow playback of a DVD disc. Push
18. ENTER Push to select the highlighted option in a
play () to resume normal play.
menu.
13. STATUS Push to display the current status.
19. / NEXT In radio modes, push to select to the next
14. MODE Push to change the mode of the selected station. In disc modes, push to advance to the next
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
for details on changing modes. navigate in the menu.
15. SETUP When in a video mode, push the SETUP Remote Control Storage
button to access the display settings (see the display The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compart-
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES mode is finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not try
selected and the disc is stopped, push the SETUP to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD to remove. To return the remote back into its storage area,
Setup Menu of this manual.) insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining
clips first, and then rotate the remote back up into the other 3. Press the Lock-out button on the touchscreen to lock
two retaining clips until it snaps back into position. the remote control. Pressing the Lock-out button on
the touchscreen a second time will unlock the remote
control.
NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the
current ignition cycle. The VES will automatically remove
the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to OFF.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for opera-
tion. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
VES Remote Control Storage 2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-
Locking The Remote Control cording to the polarity diagram shown.
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a 3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
parental control feature.
VES Headphones Operation
1. Press the MORE button on the touchscreen.
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
2. Press the Rear Entertainment button on the touch- using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls. If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position
and that the channel is not muted and the headphone
channel selector switch is on the desired channel. If audio Replacing The Headphone Batteries
is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
installed in the headphones. operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover down-
ward. 4
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-

cording to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
VES Headphones NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
1 Volume Control 3 Channel Selection Switch
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
2 Power Button 4 Power Indicator battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch.
NOTE: Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is Warranty
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
the audio of the VES Channel 1. initial user or purchaser (you or your) of this particular
When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is Unwired Technology LLC (Unwired) wireless headphone
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to (Product). The warranty is not transferable.
the audio of the VES Channel 2. How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
2. Push the MODE button on the remote control.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such as
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
a DVD Video), pushing STATUS shows the status on a
is defective in workmanship or materials.
popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pushing the
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
Selection menu appears on screen. abuse or modification of the Product other than by Un-
wired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam
the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED TECHNOL-
the available modes and push the ENTER button to OGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES
select the new mode. TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PROD-
BACK button on the remote control. UCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSE-
QUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAM-
AGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some
states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or System Information
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the
Information Mode Display
above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights,
which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will repair 4
or replace any defective Product. Unwired reserves the
right to replace any discontinued Product with a compa-
rable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WAR-
RANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EX-
CLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRAN-
TIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WAR-
RANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your When information mode is active, the current mode setting
Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- for both audio channels is displayed. In addition to the
3332 or email [email protected]. items called out by number, the remaining information
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by displays the current status of the source (such as station
phone at 1-888-293-3332. frequency, name, preset or track number, song title, artist
name, album name, etc.).
1. Channel 1 Mode Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute Audio: The audio only Numeric Keypad Menu
icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen system.
Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for
Channel 1 has been muted using the remote controls
MUTE button.
3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute Audio: Only in a single
screen system: The audio only icon is displayed on
Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode. Mute:
when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for Channel
2 has been muted using the remote controls MUTE
button.
4. Channel 2 Mode Displays the current source for
Channel 2.
5. Remote Locked Out When the icon is displayed, the Numeric Keypad Menu
remote control functions are disabled. When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows
DIRECT TUNE, pushing the remote controls ENTER but-
6. Clock Displays the time.
ton activates a numeric keypad menu. This screen makes it
7. Channel 1 Shared Status When the icon is displayed, easy to enter a specific tuner frequency or track number. To
the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the radio and enter the desired digit:
playing through the cabin speakers.
1. Push the remote controls navigation buttons (, , ,
) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, push the remote controls Disc Menu
ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
until all digits are entered. the remote controls MENU button displays a list of all
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
push the remote controls ENTER button. options you can activate or cancel Random play.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go Options Menu 4
button and push the remote controls ENTER button. When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
Station List Menu in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the Options
button on the touchscreen activates the Options Settings
When listening to Satellite audio, pushing the remote
menu. From this menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles,
controls MENU button displays a list of all available
Angle and Title.
channels. Navigate this list using the remote controls
navigation buttons to find the desired station, push the Display Settings
remote controls ENTER button to tune to that station. To When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote con-
Up and Page Down icons on the screen. trols SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu.
These settings control the appearance of the video on the
screen. The factory default settings are already set for
optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote controls naviga- 3. To change the current audio mode, push the remote
tion buttons to select an item, then push the remote controls MODE button. This will automatically select
controls navigation buttons to change the value for the the next available audio mode without using the
currently selected item. To reset all values back to the MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
and push the remote controls ENTER button.
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote controls power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
of discs (8 cm or 12 cm diameter):
DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
Display Settings Menu Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the format files
screen closed:
Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
1. Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
2. Close the video screen.
DVD Region Codes If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compat-
geographic region. These region codes must match in order
ible format and is playable on other players. To help avoid
for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
playback problems, use the following guidelines when
not match the region code for the player, the disc will stop
recording discs.
playing and a warning will be displayed. 4
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
DVD Audio Support
are playable.
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player, the
For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default (most
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the Video title
each track number is unique.
is ignored). All multi-channel program material is auto-
matically mixed down to two channels, which may result For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-
in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase the 9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format. CD-DA
volume level to account for this change in level, remember may also be used for PCM Audio contained on CD-
to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another Based Data.
mode.
The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
Recorded Discs folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs re- Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
corded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM Video_TS portion of the disc.
containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also play
DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R, DVD-RW and
DVD-ROM discs.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such as
in the DVD player, check with the disc recording software artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
publisher for more information about burning playable
Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
discs.
loaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin
(CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a permanent playing the next available file.
marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate
Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg
from the disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD player will
to the DVD player.
automatically skip the file and begin playing the next
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA AND ACC) available file.
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio If you are creating your own files, the recommended
Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s, including fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x, 9.x Windows and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio; sampling fre- between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
quencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo) audio files with the supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW). rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
The DVD player always uses the file extension to To change the current file, use the remote controls or
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always DVD players button to advance to the next file, or the
end with the extension .mp3 or .MP3, WMA files button to return to the start of the current or previous
must always end with the extension .wma or WMA, file.
and ACC files must end with the extensions .acc or
To change the current directory, use the remote controls
.m4a. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip back and
extensions for any other types of files.
fast fwd/skip forward.
Disc Errors for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise autho-
rized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a Disc Error
is prohibited.
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured un-
disc format are all potential causes for a Disc Error der license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, MLP Loss-
message. less, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby 4
Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player
will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL
forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc
is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track. plugged into the USB port.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
conditions, such as when the vehicles interior temperature iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
is above 120F (49C). When this occurs, the DVD player support the iPod control features. Please visit Apples
will display High Temp and will shut off the display until website for software updates.
a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owners
to protect the optics of the DVD player. Manual Supplement.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol-
ogy must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Push the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in the
Push the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
center of each switch. Reach behind the steering wheel to
station up from the current setting.
access the switches.
Push the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listen-
able station down from the current setting.
Push the button in the center of the switch to tune to the
next preset that you have programmed.
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
Push the top of the switch once to listen to the next track.
Push the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the
beginning of the current track or to listen to the begin-
ning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) after the current track begins to play.
Right-Hand Switch Functions Push the switch up or down twice to listen to the second
Push the top of the switch to increase the volume. track, three times to listen to the third track, and so forth.
Push the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume. Push the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following Under certain conditions, an on mobile device in your
precautions: vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not 4
wiping from center to edge. satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
off during mobile device operation when not using
the disc.
Uconnect (if equipped).
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays. CLIMATE CONTROLS
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. can be operated through either the instrument panel or
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become through the Uconnect system display.
too high. When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or display.
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
Manual Three Zone Climate Controls With
Touchscreen If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
side of the Radio 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
panel. There are also buttons on the faceplate located below
the Uconnect touchscreen.
Manual Temperature Controls Buttons On The

Faceplate
Radio 4.3 Manual with Touchscreen Climate Button On

The Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
system screen.
Radio 8.4 Manual 3 Zone Temperature Controls

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Radio 4.3 Manual 3 Zone Temperature Controls
Buttons On The Touchscreen 1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica-
tor illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button 5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica- Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
tor illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An
again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes.
3. Recirculation Button
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or CAUTION!
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. An indicator light
will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
4. Front Defrost Button Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi- with warm water.
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window defrosting and defogging. Performing this func- window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
tion will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the dow.
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
return the previous setting.
6. Rear Climate Button If Equipped passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear cli-
mate controls are ON. Performing this function again will 10. Blower Control
turn OFF the rear climate controls. Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Radio 8.4 through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds 4
Only) available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
using either the blower control knob or the buttons on the
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
touchscreen as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button (Radio knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
8.4 Only) speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
Provides the passenger with independent temperature counterclockwise.
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. Button On The Touchscreen
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
automatically exit Sync. the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower
9. SYNC can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area
between the icons.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync
feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the
11. Modes Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
amount of air is directed through the defrost
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and demist
and side window demister outlets.
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Mix Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
window demist outlets. This mode works best
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
in cold or snowy conditions.
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved 12. Climate Control OFF Button
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the ON/OFF.
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets. 13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Radio 8.4
Bi-Level Mode Only)
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets Provides the driver with independent temperature control.
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets. NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort condi-
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Radio 8.4
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
Only)
warmer air from the floor outlets.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control.
Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
15. Temperature Control (Radio 4.3 Only) Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
Press the driver or passenger temperature button on the
the windows.
touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside
the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, 4
into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
temperatures. Driver and passenger have independent
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
temperature control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
Climate Control Functions insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to MAX A/C
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys- MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool mance.
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select when MAX A/C is ON.
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes. In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation Control The rear system temperature control buttons on the touch-
screen are located in the Uconnect touch system, located on
the instrument panel.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the
Recirculation control button. The recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode
and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode
is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clear-
ing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button
Radio 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Buttons On The
to blink and then turn off. Touchscreen Controls Screen
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) If 1 Blower Up Button 5 Done Button
Equipped 2 Mode Button 6 Rear Lock Button
3 Temperature Button 7 Rear Off Button
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right 4 Blower Down Button
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front Uconnect Touchscreen
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for adjust-
ment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
4
Press the REAR button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
To return to Front screen, press the REAR button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Radio 8.4 Manual Rear Climate Button On The Rear Lock
Touchscreen Controls Screen
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
1 Rear Lock Button 5 Blower Up Button
2 Front Climate Control But- 6 Mode Button
touchscreen on the Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a
ton lock symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
3 Temperature Up Button 7 Blower Down Button and air source are controlled from the front Uconnect
4 Temperature Down Button 8 Rear Off Button system.
Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when the
Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) is located
CAUTION!
in the headliner, near the center of the vehicle.
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel. The rear outlets are located in the
right side trim panel. Do not block or place objects
directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing damage to the
blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate
the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the tem-
perature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The
Rear MTC Control Knobs rear temperature settings are displayed in the Uconnect
1 Blower Speed 3 Rear MODE
system.
2 Rear Temperature 4 Rear Temperature Lock When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect system, the
Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is
Rear Blower Control illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ig-
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, or nored.
any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low to
high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Mode Control Automatic Three Zone Temperature Control (ATC)
Headliner Mode With Touchscreen If Equipped
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of Buttons On The Faceplate
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side of the Radio 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument
side will shut off the airflow. panel. There are also buttons on the faceplate located below 4
Bi-Level Mode the Uconnect touchscreen.
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the

floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode
is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Radio 4.3 Automatic Climate Button On The Faceplate

Buttons On The Touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Automatic Temperature Controls Buttons On The

Faceplate
Radio 4.3 Automatic 3 Zone Temperature Controls

2. A/C Button
tor illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual
mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button 4

tor illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
Radio 8.4 Automatic 3 Zone Temperature Controls adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this
Buttons On The Touchscreen function will cause the ATC to switch between manual
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The mode and automatic modes. Refer to Automatic Opera-
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen) tion for more information.
1. MAX A/C Button 5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indica- Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
tor illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature
function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
turn off. blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. Performing this func- 7. Rear Climate Button If Equipped
tion will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear cli-
return the previous setting.
mate controls are ON. Performing this function again will
6. Rear Defrost Button turn OFF the rear climate controls.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window 8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Radio 8.4)
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes. NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
CAUTION! 9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button (Radio
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to 8.4)
the heating elements: Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat- automatically exit Sync.
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking 10. SYNC
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the
passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while 12. Modes
in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Sync will also
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
function with the rear climate controls. Changing the rear
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets and demist
climate control temperature setting will automatically exit
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
this feature.
Panel Mode
11. Blower Control Air comes from the outlets in the instrument 4
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
buttons on the touchscreen as follows: air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
Bi-Level Mode
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob directed through the defrost and side window
counterclockwise. demister outlets.
Buttons On The Touchscreen NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort condi-
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower warmer air from the floor outlets.
can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area
between the icons.
Floor Mode 16. Temperature Control (Radio 4.3)
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
Press the driver or passenger temperature button on the
amount of air is directed through the defrost
touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside
and side window demister outlets.
the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar
Mix Mode into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler
window demist outlets. This mode works best temperatures. Driver and passenger have independent
in cold or snowy conditions. temperature control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
13. Climate Control OFF Button Climate Control Functions
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control A/C (Air Conditioning)
ON/OFF.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Radio 8.4) manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
Push the button for cooler temperature settings. dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time. blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Radio 8.4) only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. NOTE: If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
Push the button for warmer temperature settings. glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
MAX A/C NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clear-
mance.
ing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button
when MAX A/C is ON. to blink and then turn off. 4
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
Automatic Operation
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit. 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or press the
button on the touchscreen (4), on the Automatic Tem-
Recirculation Control
perature Control (ATC) Panel.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the temperature buttons on the touchscreen or buttons on
Recirculation control button. The recirculation the faceplate. Once the desired temperature is dis-
indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push played, the system will achieve and automatically main-
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode tain that comfort level.
and allow outside air into the vehicle. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE: The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by
selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
Manual operation.
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible. NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from
each other. If any feature is controlled manually, tempera-
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
ture control will continue to operate automatically.
by selecting the US/M customer-programmable feature.
Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If
of the manual. Equipped
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain on side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
speed and transition into Auto mode. air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
Manual Operation Override
The rear system temperature control buttons are located in
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
the Uconnect system, located on the instrument panel.
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a
fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Uconnect 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Buttons On The Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Buttons On The
Touchscreen Touchscreen
1 Blower Up Button 5 Done Button 1 Rear Auto Button 6 Blower Up Button
2 Mode Button 6 Rear Lock Button 2 Rear Lock Button 7 Mode Button
3 Temperature Button 7 Rear Auto Button 3 Front Climate Button 8 Blower Down Button
4 Blower Down Button 8 Rear Off Button 4 Temperature Up Button 9 Rear Off Button
5 Temperature Down Button
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the Uconnect
Front ATC Panel touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
icon in the rear temperature knob.
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear
Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
To change the rear system settings:
ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
Press the REAR button to change control to rear control counterclockwise to AUTO.
mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control func-
tions now operate rear system. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System
will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level.
To return to Front screen, press the REAR button again, When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds. necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
Rear Lock greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to func-
tion automatically.
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
display. The rear temperature and air source are controlled for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
from the front Uconnect system. the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center of
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
rear outlets are located in the right side trim panel of
the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place objects directly 4
in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing damage to the
blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control

Rear ATC Control Features To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate
1 Blower Speed 3 Rear Mode 5 AUTO Mode the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the tem-
2 Rear Tempera- 4 Rear Tempera- perature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The
ture ture Lock rear temperature settings are displayed in the Uconnect
system.
Rear Blower Control
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect system, the
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, or Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is
any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low to illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ig-
high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the nored.
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Mode Control Operating Tips
Auto Mode NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
The rear system automatically maintains the correct suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu- Summer Operation
pants.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
Headliner Mode high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of protection and to protect against engine overheating. A
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) cool-
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one ant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
side will shut off the airflow. MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to Main-
tenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for
Bi-Level Mode proper coolant selection.
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the Winter Operation
floor outlets.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Vacation Storage
Floor Mode Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
Air comes from the floor outlets. tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging be- enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
comes a problem, increase the blower speed. Vehicle win- winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, 4
dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid slush, and snow.
weather.
A/C Air Filter
NOTE:
The climate control system filters outside air containing
Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used for dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
long periods, as fogging may occur. filtered out. Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Main-
taining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions.
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
5
Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) IF EQUIPPED . . .337
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . . .337
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 22F Or 30C) .327 Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED . . . .328 Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .330 Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .343
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). . . . . .344 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . .364
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Run Flat Tires If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Spare Tires If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . .348 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . .371
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . .372
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .356 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .357
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .362
Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .374
Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .381 Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 5
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .382 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . .388
Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . .388
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) IF Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Ethanol Fuel (E-85). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .400
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the Do not leave children or animals inside parked
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat cause serious injury or death.
belts.
Automatic Transmission
WARNING! The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
5
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
transmission into PARK and apply the parking before shifting into any driving gear.
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the CAUTION!
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
precautions are not observed:
to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
speed.
Children should be warned not to touch the parking
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
complete stop.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
speed.
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
firmly on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
This feature allows the driver to operate START/STOP Button
the ignition switch with the push of a 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
button, as long as the Remote Start/ the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the
passenger compartment. 2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
Normal Starting pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
START/STOP Button switch position will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
ENGINE START/STOP button once. the instrument cluster display will display a Vehicle
Not In Park message and the engine will remain
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position,
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage or it could roll.
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If the gear selector is in Neutral, push and release the
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle speed
the engine starting, push the button again. below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine The ignition will remain in the ACC position.
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: If the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not Extreme Cold Weather (Below 22F Or 30C)
running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of externally powered electric engine block heater (available
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position. from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions With If Engine Fails To Start
Drivers Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
WARNING! 5
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
START. To change the ignition positions without starting throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps: the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Starting with the ignition in the OFF position. Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
display will display ACC). could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to and vehicle.
place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
cluster display will display ON/RUN). may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
cluster display will display OFF). Jump-Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED
START/STOP Button) The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures, standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel: three-wire extension cord.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate effect on the engine.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it. The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Integrated
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
Power Module (Fuse Box) on the drivers side of the
once.
vehicle.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the WARNING!
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the Normal Starting procedure. Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
After Starting cord could cause electrocution.
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING! Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit mission gear selector. 5
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly a location accessible to children), and do not leave
pressing the brake pedal. the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure could operate power windows, other controls, or
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you move the vehicle.
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the CAUTION!
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, precautions are not observed:
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
(Continued) firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while System in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
shifting out of PARK. from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
Ignition Park Interlock The electronically-controlled transmission provides a pre-
cise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
engine can be turned OFF. This helps the driver avoid
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the trans-
(kilometers).
mission in PARK.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
the ignition is in the OFF position.
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System between these gears.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (-/+) shift positions. Manual
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to to AutoStick in this section for further information).
the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick (-/+) position
pedal must be pressed. (below the Drive position) activates Autostick mode, pro-
viding manual shift control and displaying the current gear
Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, tapping the
The transmission gear position display (located in the gear selector left (-) or right (+) will manually select the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. transmission gear.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (refer to Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before 5
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
Gear Selector downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Gear Ranges When exiting the vehicle, always:
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or Apply the parking brake.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This Turn the ignition OFF.
is especially important when the engine is cold. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
possible injury or damage. When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
in PARK before leaving the vehicle. be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- mission gear selector.
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the a location accessible to children), and do not leave
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
pressing the brake pedal. could operate power windows, other controls, or
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure move the vehicle.
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
(Continued)
NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of periods with the engine running. The engine may be
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK WARNING!
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can 5
damage the drivetrain. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you that limit your response to changing traffic or road
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position: conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector have a collision.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated. CAUTION!
Look at the transmission gear position display and Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector severe transmission damage. Refer to Recreational
will not move out of PARK. Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A
Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for
REVERSE (R) further information.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
DRIVE (D) up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch
This range should be used for most city and highway
is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this sec-
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
tion). During extremely cold temperatures (-16F [-27C] or
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
below), operation may briefly be limited to only second
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear (for six-
operating conditions.
speed transmission). Normal operation will resume once
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
Transmission Limp Home Mode
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
(refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmis- Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. in second gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear
(for six-speed transmission) regardless of which forward
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmis-
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
sion shift schedule and expand the range of torque con-
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
verter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent trans-
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
mission damage due to overheating.
damaging the transmission.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can Overdrive Operation
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the The automatic transmission includes an electronically con-
following steps: trolled Overdrive (top gear). The transmission will auto-
1. Stop the vehicle. matically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions
are present:
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- 5
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. perature.
5. Restart the engine. The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no ture.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
operation.
The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest Torque Converter Clutch
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos- A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
service is required. at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usu- current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
ally after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is when the driver moves the gear selector to the right (+) or
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
the AutoStick shift control, when the transmission is suffi- another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
ciently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is below.
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
AUTOSTICK essary to prevent engine over-speed.
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro- The transmission will automatically downshift as the
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, display the current gear.
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also The transmission will automatically downshift to first
provide you with more control during passing, city driv- gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
towing, and many other situations. vehicle is accelerated.
Operation You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (below gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side. or icy conditions.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector to the left (-) If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged. front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted auto-
matically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear
AutoStick is enabled.
wheels.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
or overheat condition is detected.
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick and performance characteristics. 5
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal. CAUTION!
WARNING! All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
personal injury.
Acceleration
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) IF EQUIPPED Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet or other slippery
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD). surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi- the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
tional driving skills required. Under normal driving con-
ditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the wheels.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
WARNING!
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. sudden stop.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and DRIVING THROUGH WATER
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care- Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). vent damage to your vehicle.
Traction Flowing/Rising Water

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
WARNING!
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be water can wear away the road or paths surface and
observed: cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
slushy.
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. passengers, and others around you.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal- water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and mounted on the vehicle.
Warnings before doing so. Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
WARNING! way before driving through the standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your vehicles Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects. 5
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water. Driving through standing water may cause damage
Driving through standing water limits your vehicles to your vehicles drivetrain components. Always in-
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis- spect your vehicles fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
pedal several times to dry the brakes. through standing water. Do not continue to operate
Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju- the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, may result in further damage. Such damage is not
and others around you. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicles engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
CAUTION! damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
Always check the depth of the standing water before the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
driving through it. Never drive through standing
(Continued)
POWER STEERING
CAUTION!
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
capability if power assist is lost. fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will occur.
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering Power Steering Fluid Check
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service
parking maneuvers. interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked
NOTE: if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coor-
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel dinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
WARNING!
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in
overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended power
any way damage the steering system.
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power steer-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all 5
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts
in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
Parking Brake
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the trans- ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster
mission in PARK. will illuminate.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower NOTE:
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash. If
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage. vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the child could operate power windows, other controls,
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it or move the vehicle.
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
parking brake should always be applied whenever the driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
driver is not in the vehicle. a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
WARNING! your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully and cause damage or injury.
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage. CAUTION!
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to thorized dealer immediately.
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do
(Continued)
BRAKE SYSTEM
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic possible brake damage. You would not have your
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic full braking capacity in an emergency.
systems loses normal capability, the remaining Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on
system will still function. However, there will be is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking per-
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be formance or vehicle stability during braking may
evident by increased pedal travel during application and occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or 5
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immedi-
hydraulic system, the Brake Warning Light will turn on ately.
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
with the power system operating. System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
WARNING! Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or and control in various driving conditions.
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
(Continued)
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
This function manages the distribution of the braking
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle. one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
Brake System Warning Light
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when tion(s).
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
stay on for as long as four seconds.
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
time after the stop).
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re- The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
quired. If the Brake System Warning Light does not come
Brake pedal pulsations.
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible. A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak- WARNING!
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
(Continued)
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos- Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation The yellow Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light will turn on
of such equipment should be performed by qualified when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and
professionals. may stay on for as long as four seconds.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or 5
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
stop. service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics tem will continue to operate normally if the Brake System
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak- Warning Light is not on.
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the If the Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light is on, the brake
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
traction afforded. benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those ing Light does not come on when the ignition switch is
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. as possible.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner Brake Assist System (BAS)
that could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicles braking
others. capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure down the hill as normal.
during the stopping sequence, (do not pump the brakes). The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no activate:
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated. The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
WARNING!
Park brake must be off.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor Driver door must be closed.
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa- (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of The system will not activate if the transmission is in
others. PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
remain active.
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
active driving involvement. It is always the drivers or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve- ing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the 5
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
required while driving to maintain safe control of your Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
a collision or serious personal injury. with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
Towing With HSA parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer. Disabling And Enabling HSA
WARNING! This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
For vehicles equipped with the Instrument Cluster Dis-
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
play, refer to Instrument Cluster Display in Under-
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
standing Your Instrument Panel for further informa-
tion.
(Continued)
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to 8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
Panel for further information. properly, the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink sev-
eral times to confirm HSA is disabled.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps: 9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward). Traction Control System (TCS)
2. Shift the transmission into PARK. This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
3. Apply the parking brake. apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
4. Start the engine. reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
turn to the left. controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
6. Push the ESC Off button located in the lower switch on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
bank below the climate control four times within twenty system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
seconds. The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
and turn off two times. that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply- adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in conditions.
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle WARNING!
maintain the desired path.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in- 5
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
condition. planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
appropriate for the steering wheel position. driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
appropriate for the steering wheel position. exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the others.
ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/ Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
(Continued)
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly To enter the Partial Off mode, momentarily push the
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any ESC Off switch and the ESC Off Indicator Light will
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can the ESC Off switch and the ESC Off Indicator Light
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle will turn off.
rollover, personal injury and death. NOTE:
ESC Operating Modes When in Partial Off mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
TCS section), has been disabled and the ESC Off
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in Partial
ESC On Off mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the ESC system is reduced.
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific system is in the Partial Off mode.
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off WARNING!
The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
(Continued)
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
including those resulting from excessive speed in Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan- road conditions.
ing. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
NOTE:
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC 5
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
OFF Indicator Light
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine run- The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
ning. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal- when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this light that caused the ESC activation.
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
monitoring the drivers steering wheel input and the speed swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to Trailer
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or Towing in this section for further information.
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/ Malfunc-
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
tion Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
WARNING! swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions Partial Off mode.
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent WARNING!
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve- stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle load to eliminate trailer sway.
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the
safety of others.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
Tire Markings P (Passenger) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
5
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load
Code (TIN) Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
3 Service Description 6 Treadwear, Traction and tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall
Temperature Grades
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
R means radial construction, or
D means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its
load index under certain operating conditions 5
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under speci-
fied operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed
limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In- 5
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturers recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicles
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the drivers
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operat-
ing section of this manual. 5
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs,
vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to Vehicle Load-
ing in the Starting And Operating section of this
manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the: To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. XXX lbs on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare weight referenced here.
tires.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit Metric Example For Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occu- For example, if XXX amount equals 635 kg and there will
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
on your vehicles placard. available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. NOTE:
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passen- If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX
with varying seating configurations and number and
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) =
carry capacity of your vehicle.
650 lbs.)
For the following example, the combined weight of
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
(392 kg).
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas vehicle control.
are affected by improper tire pressure: Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Safety and Vehicle Stability Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
Economy to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Tread Wear Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
Ride Comfort mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Safety Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
WARNING! response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can NOTE:
cause collisions. Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result erratic and unpredictable steering response.
in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tires ability to cushion Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause vehicle to drift left or right.
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
Fuel Economy
CAUTION!
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
Tread Wear and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal damage the valve stem.
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
for earlier tire replacement. 5
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
Tire Inflation Pressures inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
drivers side B-Pillar or rear edge of the drivers side door. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
At least once a month: perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
12F (7C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
the Winter.
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated. Example: If garage temperature = 68F (20C) and the
outside temperature = 32F (0C) then the cold tire inflation
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which Radial Ply Tires
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (7C) for this outside
temperature condition. WARNING!
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. The instability could cause a collision. Always use
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- Tire Repair
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
the following criteria:
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to The tire has not been driven on when flat.
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
and cold tire inflation pressures.
The puncture is no greater than a of an inch (6 mm).
WARNING! Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum additional information.
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
WARNING!
All Season Tires If Equipped
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary be- death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be possibility of loss of vehicle control.
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure Snow Tires
5
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
your vehicle. during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi- If you need snow tires, select tires
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. equivalent in size and type to the origi-
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving in sets of four; failure to do so may
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am- adversely affect the safety and handling
bient temperatures are less than 40F (5C) or if roads are of your vehicle.
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
authorized dealer.
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and Spare Tires If Equipped
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
of a spare tire, please refer to the Tire Service Kit section
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
located in your Owners Information kit for further infor-
using these tire types.
mation.
Run Flat Tires If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles CAUTION!
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Damage to the vehicle may result.
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Wheel If Equipped
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
mode. tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa- vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
tion. your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side door needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. 5
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Collapsible Spare Tire If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a drivers side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
on the vehicle at any given time. tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING! Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
(Continued)
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Limited Use Spare If Equipped
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire. only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
WARNING! for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result WARNING!
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
Full Size Spare If Equipped lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep in-
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the flated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the drivers
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first control.
opportunity.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicles wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In
Emergencies for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicles wheels faster than 30 mph Tire Tread
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when 1 Worn Tire
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning 2 New Tire
wheel, no matter what the speed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread Wear Indicators grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
help you in determining when your tires should be re- worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
placed. replaced. Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for
Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
including, but not limited to: oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
Driving style.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
Distance driven. replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on Tread
Wear Indicator. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equip-
schedule is highly recommended.
ment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found
in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for
WARNING! more information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six Symbol of a tire.
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in your vehicles handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
serious injury or death. sure that the wheels specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size 5
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen- ings.
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak- TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
ponents. You could lose control and have a collision
damage.
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
vehicle. recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
Install on Front Tires Only.
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could Due to limited clearance, P225/65R17 tire with a Secu-
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose rity Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction
control and have a collision. device or equivalent is recommended.
(Continued)
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) Observe the traction device manufacturers instruc-
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
handling. You could lose control and have a collision. and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturers if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION! Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions: TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Because of restricted traction device clearance be- The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
tween tires and other suspension components, it is different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
important that only traction devices in good condi- braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious rates.
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
damaged parts of the device before further use. benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
Install device as tightly as possible and then re- sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
tighten after driving about mile (0.8 km). Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large quiet ride.
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper main-
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave- tenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
ment. wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
(Continued)
The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in Treadwear
the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
some directional tires that must not be reversed. wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the 5
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tires ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
Tire Rotation
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by the WARNING!
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific
grade rating assigned by the tires manufacturer in each The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety traction characteristics.
requirements in addition to these grades.
Temperature Grades TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under con- mended cold placard pressure.
trolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material
(7 kPa) for every 12F (6.5C). This means that when the
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
minimum required by law.
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And
WARNING! Operating for information on how to properly inflate the
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a vehicles tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Ex- vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
cessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, adjustment for this increased pressure.
either separately or in combination, can cause heat The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
buildup and possible tire failure. tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicles
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold recommended cold placard pressure value.
placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light to turn off. CAUTION!
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need The TPMS has been optimized for the original
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and 5
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the warnings have been established for the tire size
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure eration or sensor damage may result when using
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
order for the TPMS to receive this information. cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68F (20C) and sensor function checked.
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera- After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ture drop to 20F (-7C) will decrease the tire pressure to ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to Sensor.
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire
NOTE: Premium System
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
condition. monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge readings to the receiver module.
while adjusting your tire pressure.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under- maintain the proper pressure.
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping
ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display

The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster display
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 5
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime Tire Pressure Monitor Display
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
will display a graphic showing an Inflate to XXX mes-
in the instrument cluster display graphic) to the vehicles
sage and a graphic of each tire with the low tire pressure
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the sys-
values in a different color.
tem receives the updated tire pressures, shown in the
Inflate to XXX message, the system will automatically
update and the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will change color back to the original color, and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS sensors.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
affects radio wave signals.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information. 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
Service TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
NOTE:
a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being the pressure in the compact spare tire.
received.
If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain on and a
will no longer flash, and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instru-
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will ment cluster will still display a pressure value in a
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due different color.
to any of the following:
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above TPMS Deactivation If Equipped
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
tale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini- installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your ve-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in hicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
place of the pressure value. and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive 5
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will the vehicle for 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, TPMS will chime, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and the instrument cluster will display a SERVICE TPM and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and instrument cluster will display the SERVICE TPM SYS-
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. TEM message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, telltale and display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off in place of the pressure values.
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPM Telltale
in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next method. The use of higher octane Premium gasoline is
ignition switch cycle the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes- not required, as it will not provide any benefit over
sage will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault Regular gasoline in these engines.
exists.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
General Information hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
following two conditions:
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
including interference that may cause undesired operation. starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
by the party responsible for compliance could void the ing service for the vehicle.
users authority to operate the equipment. Reformulated Gasoline
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
sions regulations and provide optimum
quality.
fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded Regular The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly
gasoline having a posted octane number blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved perfor-
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 mance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
ates such as ethanol.
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and many void
CAUTION!
or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline ranty.
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles 5
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emis- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate ranty.
if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol Operate in a lean mode.
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty. Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications Materials Added To Fuel
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo- stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
MMT In Gasoline line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
gasoline is recommended. Visit
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether phragm materials.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
CAUTION! you.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles Carbon Monoxide Warnings
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal WARNING!
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. 5
mance and damage the emissions control system.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
oxide poisoning:
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) IF
WARNING!
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the agent and never use it near an open flame.
other sections of this manual for information on features
that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible Fuel Requirements
Fuel powered vehicles. If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
CAUTION! fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be-
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85. tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) When switching fuel types:
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15% Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
unleaded gasoline. Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE: Starting
Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and when ambient temperatures fall below 0F (-18C). In the
rough idle following start up may be experienced even if range of 0F (-18C) to 32F (0C), an increase in the time it
the above recommendations are followed, especially takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
when the ambient temperature is below 32F (0C). deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel. 5
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi- improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
tive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may ambient temperature is less than 32F (0C).
be used. Cruising Range
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi-
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and
engine oils. These special requirements are included in the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA compared to gasoline operation.
Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that engine Replacement Parts
oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of
Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC Ethanol compatible service components are required.
engines.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine to
start under cold conditions, may affect drivability, and
could cause engine damage.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
ADDING FUEL NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforce-
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ment.
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure WARNING!
the replacement cap has been designed for use with this
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle.
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
(Continued)
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
ground while filling.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
injury or death. If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
5
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
CAUTION! word gASCAP will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control heard and push the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off
system could result from using an improper fuel the message. If the problem persists, the message will
tank filler tube cap. appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the Mal- may also turn on the MIL. Refer to Onboard Diagnostic
function Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on. System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor-
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top mation.
off the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle VEHICLE LOADING
clicks or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
NOTE: Vehicle Certification Label. This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Vehicle Certification Label axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the
rear GAWR.
drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the drivers door.
The label contains the following information: WARNING!
Name of manufacturer
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is impor-
Month and year of manufacture tant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if
either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front vehicle and have a collision.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Overloading
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
Type of vehicle etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
rear GAWR.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load is not over the GVWR.
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle TRAILER TOWING
separately. It is important that you distribute the load In this section you will find safety tips and information on
evenly over the front and rear axles. limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
components do not necessarily increase the vehicles possible.
GVWR.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
5
Loading follow the requirements and recommendations in this
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items Common Towing Definitions
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
you in understanding the following information:
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
brakes operate. the GVWR. Refer to Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label in Starting And Operating for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING!
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo- It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
operation condition. can result if either rating is exceeded.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your Tongue Weight (TW)
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
the trailer must be supported by the scale. hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) the load on your vehicle.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle Frontal Area
and trailer when weighed in combination. The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) maximum width of the front of a trailer.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear Trailer Sway Control Electronic
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles Refer to Electronic Brake Control System/Trailer Sway
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Control (TSC) in Starting And Operating for further
rear GAWR. Refer to Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- information.
tion Label in Starting And Operating for further infor-
mation.
Trailer Sway Control Mechanical for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
swaying motions while traveling.
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
Weight-Carrying Hitch may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
5
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some Rating (GAWR) requirements.
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they WARNING!
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
trailers. system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
Weight-Distributing Hitch formance, and could result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
vehicles front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturers directions, it provides
Trailer Hitch Classification and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
GCWR (Gross Com- Max. GTW (Gross Max. Tongue

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
bined Wt. Rating) Trailer Wt.) Wt.
2.4L/Automatic 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg) 22 sq ft 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) 5
(2.0 sq m) which includes up to 5
persons & Luggage
3.6L/Automatic 7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft 2,500 lbs (1 133 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
(3.0 sq m) which includes 1 to 2
persons & Luggage
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
(3.0 sq m) which includes 3 to 4
persons & Luggage
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft 1,500 lbs (680 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
(3.0 sq m) which includes 5 to 7 * Except for
persons & Luggage AWD models
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to Tire Safety
Information in Starting And Operating for further
information.
* For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying 5 to 7
persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) and therefore should not be
attempted.
Trailer And Tongue Weight Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch. The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed op-
tions must be considered as part of the total load on your WARNING!
vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
and cargo for your vehicle. guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
Towing Requirements Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer 5
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain and that it will not shift during travel. When traile-
components the following guidelines are recommended: ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
CAUTION! control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
or other parts could be damaged. cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do pension, chassis structure, or tires.
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine Safety chains must always be used between your
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
loads. frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance slack for turning corners.
Schedule. Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further
(Continued)
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmis- towing a trailer. Refer to Tires General Information
sion in PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer in Starting And Operating for the proper inspection
wheels. procedure.
GCWR must not be exceeded. When replacing tires, refer to Tires General Informa-
Total weight must be distributed between the tow tion in Starting And Operating for information on
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement
ratings are not exceeded: procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
1. GVWR capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and
GAWR limits.
2. GTW
Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes
3. GAWR
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
Towing Requirements Tires This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
spare tire.
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Tires General Information in Starting And Operat- brake controller is not required.
ing for proper tire inflation procedures.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of (If Equipped)
2,000 lbs (907 kg). Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
WARNING! motoring safety.
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicles hy- The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys- wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes 5
connector.
when you need them and could have a collision.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis- NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
tance. When towing you should allow for additional harness.
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision. but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector

1 Female Pins 4 Park 1 Battery 5 Ground
2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop/Turn 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop/Turn
3 Ground 6 Right Stop/Turn 3 Right Stop/Turn 7 Running Lamps
4 Electric Brakes
Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
traffic.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Automatic Transmission you can get back to cruising speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the maximize fuel efficiency. 5
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
AutoStick
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting est gear that allows for adequate performance and
and heat build up. This action will also provide better avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose 4 if
engine braking. the desired speed can be maintained. Choose 3 or 2
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation, then change the transmission To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
fluid and filter as specified for police, taxi, fleet, or driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
frequent trailer towing. Refer to the Maintenance Sched- to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
ule for the proper maintenance intervals. higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission fluid
level before towing. The six-speed transmission does not
require a fluid level check before towing. If, however, you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, see your
authorized dealer immediately for assistance.
Cooling System Highway Driving
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat- Reduce speed.
ing, take the following actions:
Air Conditioning
City Driving
Turn off temporarily.
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Mod-
els
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow age from improper towing is not covered under the
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
procedure:
Recreational Towing All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
5
the dolly manufacturers instructions. Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmission vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the
in PARK. ground.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
CAUTION!
the dolly manufacturers instructions.
5. Release the parking brake. Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
CAUTION!
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive- ranty.
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .404 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
2.4L Engine If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .405 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 6
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .407 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .424
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS In city traffic while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate controls. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
the Hazard Warning flashers.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your High. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
other motorists. engine cooling system.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even WARNING!
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
may wear down your battery. see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways slow down.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads H, safely pull wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the A/C lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal brated torque wrench.
range. If the pointer remains on the H, and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine OFF immediately, Torque Specifications
and call for service.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/ 6
2.4L Engine If Equipped Bolt Size Bolt
Socket
On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too
Size
hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL message 100 Ft-Lbs (135 Nm) M12 x 1.5 19 mm
will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be **Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the engine nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
oil temperature is reduced. tightening.
NOTE: The maximum vehicle speed is reduced to 48 mph Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
(77 km/h), you may reduce vehicle speed further as tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced, you
may continue to drive normally
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You 6
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
Jack Storage Location
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on Spare Tire Location
a jack. The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing and is held in place by means of a cable winch mechanism.
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
Preparations For Jacking
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
slippery areas. edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover in
the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Removal
WARNING!
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating mechanism.
the jack or changing the wheel.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. storage and assemble them.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when

the vehicle is being jacked.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
1 Spare Tire Jack Handle
2 Extension 1
3 Extension 2
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the small
ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at the end
of component 3. This will lock these components together.
Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel nut socket
at the end of component 1 faces upward when seated on
component 2. This will make it easier to rotate the assem-
bly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut
located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jack-handle
6
assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull the
spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
Spare Tire Retainer
CAUTION! Spare Tire Stowage
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the NOTE: Refer to Spare Tire Removal for information on
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power assembling the winch tools.
tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch. 1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tires tread is on the ground
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing away
raise it upright so the tires tread is on the ground. from the rear of the vehicle.
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and 2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
remove it from the center of the wheel. it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut.
Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to raise the
spare tire into the storage area. Continue to rotate the Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack-handle assembly until you hear the winch mecha- jack.
nism click three times. It cannot be over tightened. Push Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
in place. service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
Jacking Instructions lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
WARNING! careful of motor traffic.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from stow-
CAUTION!
age.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the wheel
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
Instructions for this vehicle. one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Place the jack in the notches underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle between
the drain flute formations on the sill flange. Turn the
jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange.
Front Jacking Location Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle

Rear Jacking Location Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire just
clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,

remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel Mounting Spare Tire
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges. NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
6. Install the spare tire. center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
CAUTION! Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited-Use

Spare under Tires General Information in Start-
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem ing and Operating for additional warnings, cautions,
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the and information about the spare tire, its use, and
spare tire is mounted incorrectly. operation.
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the assembled
WARNING!
jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate the jack-
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tight-
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in ened.
serious injury. 13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter- blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake.
clockwise with the jack handle. 14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the tire pressure as required. 6
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased Road Tire Installation
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If in 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
service station. wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage
location. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or re-
placed as soon as possible.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
WARNING!
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been excessive force to install the cover.
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
serious injury. of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If in
2 Valve Notch 5 Road Wheel
3 Wheel Lug Nut doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
seated against the wheel.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end JUMP-STARTING
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
nuts. started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another 6
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-
WARNING! starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
serious injury. Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
CAUTION!
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
been tightened twice. For proper lug nut torque refer to Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
Torque Specifications in this secton. If in doubt about the or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow
WARNING!
the manufacturers operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. blades.
To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery posts Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
located on the left side of the engine compartment. bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
Remote Battery Posts (+) battery post. To remove the cover, push the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
1 Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 Remote Negative (-) Post
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park Connecting The Jumper Cables
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
WARNING! 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
could result. negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper 6
Jump-Starting Procedure
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could WARNING!
result in personal injury or property damage due to
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
battery explosion.
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
CAUTION! personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
or the discharged vehicle. battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
CAUTION!
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicles battery, even when not
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the re- in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
mote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicles
battery. battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
the remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle. least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will main-
tain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, racing the engine.
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer. CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION!

least one minute after every five rocking-motion When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
free a stuck vehicle. result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
Push the ESC Off switch, to place the Electronic
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
Stability Control (ESC) system in ESC Partial
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis- 6
Off mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
sion shifting occurring).
Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Op-
erating for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
mode. If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
WARNING! procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated 1. Turn the engine OFF.
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicles wheels 3. Open the center console and remove the gear selector
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 override access cover (located in the front lower right
seconds continuously without stopping when you are corner of the console storage bin).
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the access
port, and push and hold the override release lever
forward.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
Gear Selector Override Access Cover

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE IF transmission is oper- NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear able: NOT ALLOWED
Transmission in NEU-
TRAL 6
25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed
15 miles (24 km)
max distance
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment mode, not the ACC mode.
manufacturers instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicles battery is
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
discharged, refer to Gear Selector Override in this section
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
for towing.
under tow must be observed.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
Do not use sling type equipment when towing. all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam- is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing. wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission
may result. The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
opposite end on a towing dolly.
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can cause
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War- towing is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
ranty. Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
6
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicles systems performed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . .429 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . .430 A/C Air Filter If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II . . .430 Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 7
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) AWD Models
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) AWD Models
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . .469
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center) . .462 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp . . . .467 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2.4L
1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 Air Cleaner Filter
3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4Speed Only If Equipped)
4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 11 Coolant Pressure Cap
6 Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 12 Engine Oil Dipstick
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L
1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter

2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick
4 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 Engine Oil Fill
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the current government regulations.
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans- If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
mission control systems. When these systems are operating will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
WARNING!
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
CAUTION! If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
device, it may:
further damage to the emission control system. It
Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
can be performed. 7
accident involving serious injury or death.
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
Access, or allow others to access, information
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
information.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity For further information, refer to Cybersecurity in the
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic Understanding Your Instrument Panel section.
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac- If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
service of your vehicle and emissions system. word gASCAP will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is
heard and push the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
the message. If the problem persists, the message will can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
appear the next time the vehicle is started. vehicles OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicles emissions control system. 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on happen:
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
ready for testing. to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicles
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- to the I/M station.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi- not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicles
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M DEALER SERVICE
station. Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, which include detailed service information for your ve-
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to procedure yourself.
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys- 7
indicate that the system is now ready. tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD II system is penalties being assessed against you.
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced WARNING!
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail You can be badly injured working on or around a
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
running. have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
REPLACEMENT PARTS have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled main-
tenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance flush is needed because of component malfunction,
services determined by the engineers who designed your use only the specified fluid for the flushing proce-
vehicle. dure.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
Maintenance Schedule, there are other components Engine Oil
which may require servicing or replacement in the future. Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
CAUTION! maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
repairs and service when necessary could result in check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
more costly repairs, damage to other components or warmed engine is shut off. Checking engine oil level when
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.
have potential malfunctions examined by an autho- Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
rized dealer or qualified repair center. only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
that protect the performance and durability of your range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter- consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo- zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine, MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a marking will raise the oil level to the high end of the range
marking.
(Continued)
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Identification Symbol
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine will
cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure This symbol means that the oil has been
and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage certified by the American Petroleum In-
your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill cap is replaced stitute (API). The manufacturer only rec-
and tightened after adding oil. ommends API Certified engine oils.
Change Engine Oil This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is 30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
CAUTION! 7
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa-
tion. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
Engine Oil Viscosity 2.4L Engine
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers. MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Selection
This engine oil improves low temperature starting and
For best performance and maximum protection under all vehicle fuel economy.
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395. engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the
engine oil filler cap location, refer to Engine Compart- Synthetic Engine Oils
ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa- You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
tion. mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifica- mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number followed.
should not be used. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 3.6L Engine certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva- Materials Added To Engine Oil
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
fuel economy. engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Compart-
ment illustration in this section. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where
meeting MS-6395 is not available. used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
every engine oil change. hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
Engine Oil Filter Selection etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
This manufacturers engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service. The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
recommended. assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. 7
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Maintenance-Free Battery
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance
Schedules section for the proper maintenance intervals. Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assembly do
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
not need to be removed to access the compartment.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine com-
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
partment for jump-starting. Refer to Jump-Starting Pro-
cedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further
(Continued)
information.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
CAUTION!
right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
shield. It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
WARNING! positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
posts and free of corrosion.
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
large amounts of water.
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
fast charger to provide starting voltage.
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output Air Conditioner Maintenance
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other. For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con- be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after start of each warm season. This service should include
handling. cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
WARNING!
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap- fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam- manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap- performed by authorized dealer using recovery and recy-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys- cling equipment.
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
further warranty information. PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un- A/C Air Filter If Equipped
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or 7
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper main-
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be tenance intervals.
done by an experienced technician.
WARNING!
CAUTION! Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the 4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
glove compartment. Perform the following steps to replace cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove com-
partment inward while gently pulling the glove com-
partment door outward until both tabs clear the door
opening in the instrument panel.
A/C Air Filter Replacement

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
Glove Compartment Removal
cover.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
CAUTION!
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
install the filter properly will result in the need to Windshield Wiper Blades
replace it more often.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
7. Reinstall the glove compartment door. Make sure that windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
the hinges are seated fully as you raise the door. mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
Otherwise, the door latch will not align properly. of salt or road film.
Body Lubrication Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may 7
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
dry windshield.
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica- petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward
to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
holder.
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
Removing The Wiper Blade

Lifting The Pivot Cap 1 Wiper Blade
2 Blade Pivot Pin
1 Wiper Arm 3 Wiper Arm
2 Pivot Cap 4 Wiper Blade Holder
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
unless the pivot cap is raised first. holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade wiper blade until it snaps into place.
off of the liftgate glass.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
WARNING!
place.
Adding Washer Fluid Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
The windshield washer and the rear window washer share must be exercised when filling or working around the
the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the washer solution.
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind- Exhaust System
shield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
water. system.
7
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
clean. This will help blade performance. or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
information can be found on most washer fluid containers. loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
fluid when the message LoWASH appears in the instru-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
ment cluster.
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
to Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas in Things To Know mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa- ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
tion. malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over resulting in possible damage to the converter and
materials that can burn. Such materials might be vehicle.
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
where your exhaust system can contact anything that keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
can burn. operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
CAUTION!
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded you.
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective- In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
and may seriously reduce engine performance and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
cause serious damage to the engine. vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturers specifications,
(Continued)
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
motion. cap when the radiator is hot.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle. Coolant Checks
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
or malfunctioning operating conditions. appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the 7
Cooling System front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
WARNING! garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon- Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
the LOCK position. The fan is temperature con- bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
trolled and can start at any time the ignition switch is
Cooling System Drain, Flush And Refill
in the ON position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact your local autho-
(Continued) rized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper main- Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
tenance intervals. coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
Selection Of Coolant rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in Main- the radiator.
taining Your Vehicle for further information. This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
CAUTION! Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than freeze) is not recommended.
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
Adding Coolant
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ- coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
freeze) or any globally compatible coolant (anti- (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
(Continued)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
to be added to the system, please contact your local
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
authorized dealer.
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032. Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below 34F (37C)
sible. 7
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance. Cooling System Pressure Cap
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti- coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine recovery bottle.
cooling system. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
NOTE: accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
It is the owners responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Coolant Level
WARNING!
2.4L Engine The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. With the engine idling and warm to normal operating
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the temperature, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the between the ADD and FULL lines, shown on the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres- bottle.
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap 3.6L Engine The level of the coolant in the pressurized
while the system is hot or under pressure. coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci- range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
damage may result. no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the cool-
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with ant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to main-
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or tain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-
diately.
Points To Remember MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
ponents.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti- equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
freeze) to enter the radiator. condenser clean.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. 7
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) Brake System
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested intervals.
for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid. Refer
WARNING!
to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in Maintain-
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi- ing Your Vehicle for further information.
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake WARNING!
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid.
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in
capacity in an emergency.
Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information.
Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
the Brake Warning Light indicates system failure. vehicle is also identified on the original factory
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perform- installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
ing underhood services. To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. a open container absorbs moisture from the air
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
cause leaking in the system. to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. result in a collision.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are re-
placed. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak (Continued)
and a checkup may be needed.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the ers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
avoid its contact with these surfaces. filter changes. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genu-
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate ine Parts in this section for fluid specifications.
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. Special Additives
This could result in a collision.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
7
Automatic Transmission special additives in the transmission.
Selection Of Lubricant Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered

product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
only the manufacturers specified transmission fluid. Refer use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in this section transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or
CAUTION!
cold. You can also read the transmission fluid tempera-
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as ture using the instrument cluster. Refer to Instrument
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- Cluster Display in Understanding Your Instrument
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Panel for further information. Hot fluid is approxi-
Limited Warranty. mately 180F (82C), which is the normal operating
temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles
Fluid Level Check Four-Speed Automatic (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between
Transmission the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature of approxi-
Use the following procedure to check the transmission mately 80F (27C).
fluid level properly: 7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if
procedure. the actual level is at or above the hole.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
pedal. crosshatched area marked HOT (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
4. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
the lower two holes in the area marked COLD.
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube
to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After adding
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait at least
from entering the transmission.
two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission Fluid Level Check Six-Speed Automatic
before rechecking the fluid level. Transmission
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be be- adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
tween the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
fluid at approximately 80F (27C). If the fluid level is sion filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
correctly established at 80F (27C), it should be between authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level
the HOT (upper) reference holes when the transmission using a special service dipstick. If you notice fluid leakage
reaches 180F (82C). Remember it is best to check the level or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer
at the normal operating temperature. immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can 7
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake. cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur- If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
ers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shud- may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
der, and will require more frequent fluid and filter to adjust the fluid level accurately.
changes. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts in this section for fluid specifications. Fluid And Filter Changes
Dirt and water in the transmission can cause serious
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper main-
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering the
tenance intervals.
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid,
make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated properly.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes Power Transfer Unit (PTU) AWD Models Only
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
Lubricant Selection
disassembled for any reason.
Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) AWD Models Only Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in Maintaining
Lubricant Selection Your Vehicle for further information.
Use only the manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to Fluid Level Check
Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
Your Vehicle for further information. leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
Fluid Level Check fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the fill
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
hole.
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the fill
Frequency Of Fluid Change
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. tenance intervals.
Frequency Of Fluid Change Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
tenance intervals.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, Washing
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion. If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Remover to remove.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle. Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
What Causes Corrosion? paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
7
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
and protective coatings from your vehicle. that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. CAUTION!
Stone and gravel impact.
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
Insects, tree sap and tar. as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
Salt in the air near seacoast localities. metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
month. a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
open.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently
considered the responsibility of the owner. damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner. CAUTION!
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These prod-
packaged and sealed. ucts may damage the wheels protective finish. Avoid
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
or stone shields behind each wheel. brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish.
Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as mended.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
Equipped cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR
a clean, dry towel. Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. maintain the original condition.
7
For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, WARNING!
damp towel to remove soap residue. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
protectants on Stain Repel products. areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Interior Care
CAUTION!
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting. Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, sun-
tan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for damage. Wipe away immediately.
leather upholstery.
Glass Surfaces
CAUTION!
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Damage caused by these type of products may not be MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
CAUTION! with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton that may scratch the elements.
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
Cleaning Headlights directly on the mirror.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights. The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed cloth.
by rinsing.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Seat Belt Maintenance FUSES
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. WARNING!
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
buckles do not work properly. injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is 7
WARNING! off and that all the other services are switched off
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and and/or disengaged.
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. rized dealer.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies bag system, braking system), power unit systems
must be replaced after a collision if they have been (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The Cupholders

Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

F100 30 Amp Pink 110V AC Inverter If Equipped
F101 10 Amp Red Interior Lights
F102 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter in Instrument Panel/Left Rear
Power Outlet
F103 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet in Console Bin/Power Outlet
in Rear of Console
F105 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats If Equipped
F106 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Outlet
F107 10 Amp Red Rear Camera If Equipped
F108 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel
F109 10 Amp Red Climate Control/HVAC
F110 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F112 10 Amp Red Spare
F114 20 Amp Yellow Rear HVAC Blower/Motor
F115 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F116 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster (EBL)

F117 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F118 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F119 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module
F120 10 Amp Red All Wheel Drive If Equipped
F121 15 Amp Blue Wireless Ignition Node
F122 25 Amp Clear Driver Door Module
F123 25 Amp Clear Passenger Door Module
F124 10 Amp Red Mirrors
F125 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module 7
F126 25 Amp Clear Audio Amplifier
F127 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow If Equipped
F128 15 Amp Blue Radio
F129 15 Amp Blue Video/DVD If Equipped
F130 15 Amp Blue Climate Control/Instrument Panel
F131 10 Amp Red Passenger Assistance/Hands Free System
If Equipped
F132 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Module
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
The power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment.
Power Distribution Center

F101 60 Amp Yellow Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F105 60 Amp Yellow Interior Power Distribution Center Rail Igni-
tion Run Relay
F106 60 Amp Yellow Interior Power Distribution Center Rail Run/
Accessory Relays
F139 40 Amp Green Climate Control System Blower
F140 30 Amp Pink Power Locks

F141 40 Amp Green Anti-Lock Brake System
F142 40 Amp Green Glow Plugs If Equipped
F143 40 Amp Green Exterior Lights 1
F144 40 Amp Green Exterior Lights 2
F145 30 Amp Pink To Body Computer Lamp
F146 30 Amp Pink Spare
F147 30 Amp Pink Spare
F148 40 Amp Green Radiator Fan Motor
F149 30 Amp Pink Starter Solenoid 7
F150 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Control Modules
F151 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washer Motor If Equipped
F152 25 Amp Clear Diesel Fuel Heater If Equipped
F153 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F156 10 Amp Red Brake/Electronic Stability Control Module
F157 10 Amp Red Power Transfer Unit Module If Equipped
F158 10 Amp Red Active Hood Module If Equipped
F160 20 Amp Yellow Interior Lights
F161 20 Amp Yellow Horn

F162 40 Amp Red/20 Cabin Heater #1/Vacuum Pump If
Amp Lt. Blue Equipped
F163 50 Amp Red Cabin Heater #2 If Equipped
F164 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Auto Shutdown
F165 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain Shutdown
F166 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F167 30 Amp Green Powertrain Shutdown
F168 10 Amp Red Air Conditioner Clutch
F169 40 Amp Green Emissions Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Motor
F170 15 Amp Blue Emissions Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Actuators
F172 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F173 25 Amp Clear Anti Lock Brake Valves
F174 20 Amp Yellow Siren If Equipped
F175 30 Amp Green Spare
F176 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Modules

F177 20 Amp Yellow All Wheel Drive Module If Equipped
F178 25 Amp Clear Sunroof If Equipped
F179 10 Amp Red Battery Sensor
F181 100 Amp Blue Electrohydraulic Steering (EHPS) If
Equipped
F182 50 Amp Red Cabin Heater #3 If Equipped
F184 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper Motor
REPLACEMENT BULBS
7
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Incandescent) 578
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Optional LED) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Cargo Lamp 579
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp 9006
High Beam Headlamp 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal 3757AK
Side Marker Lamp 168
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W or 2504
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp 168
Exterior Bulbs Rear (LED Version)
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamp WY21W or 7440A
Backup Lamp W21W or 7440
Exterior Bulbs Rear (Bulb Version)
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp P27/7W or 3157
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp P27/7W or 3157
Backup Lamp P27/7W or 3157
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn Signal/Park
Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter 7
housing and position the Totally Integrated Power Module
1 Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
(TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left headlamp 2 Side Marker Lamp Bulb
housing. 3 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
4 High Beam Headlamp Bulb
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from
3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
the headlamp housing.
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the head-

lamp housing and rotate it turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing the Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector
left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right front
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the wheel
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
well.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel CAUTION!
well access panel and remove the access panel.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
housing. bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly
straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
The tail lamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp 7
1. Open the liftgate. Inboard Tail Lamp Housing Fasteners
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
between the body panel and the outboard side of the tail
tail lamp housing.
lamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange on the
inboard side of the tail lamp housing with the other
hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to
disengage the tail lamp housing from the vehicle.
4. Rotate the applicable bulbs electrical connector turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the tail trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
lamp housing and rotate the connector turn clockwise tail lamp housing from the liftgate.
to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
Changing The Backup Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the tail lamp hous-
ing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate.
Tail Gate Lamp

4. Rotate the applicable bulbs electrical connector turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing
and rotate the connector turn clockwise to lock it in
Tail Lamp Housing Retainers place.
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
between the tail lamp housing and the liftgate. Use the
License Plate Lamp 4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of the
lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that 5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
position. and rotate the connector turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into the
housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite end
of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks in the
housing.
License Lamp
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the lens
with the locking tab and the surrounding housing and
then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the housing.
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulbs
electrical connector turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models 20.5 Gallons 77.6 Liters
All-Wheel Drive Models 21 Gallons 79.8 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System 8 Quarts 7.5 Liters
(MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
3.6L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System 13.1 Quarts 12.4 Liters
(MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR 14.5 Quarts 13.7 Liters
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Re-
fer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. 7
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine If 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Equipped
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci- Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust in-
ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may hibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech- compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should plug the radiator.
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol- This vehicle has not been designed for use with
ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any glob- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
ally compatible coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cool- freeze) is not recommended.
ing system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
We recommend MOPAR ATF+4 fluid.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use MOPAR Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use MOPAR Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is accept- 7
able.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +
4, or MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
8
478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
for fleet customers.
scheduled maintenance.
Severe Duty All Models
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
ambient temperatures, and E-85 fuel usage will influence RPMs. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
when the Change Oil or Oil Change Required message
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles Check engine oil level.
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
Check windshield washer fluid level.
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
referring to the steps described under Instrument Cluster master cylinder, power steering, and transmission (4-
Display in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for speed only) and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479
Required Maintenance Intervals. Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following page Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages
for the required maintenance intervals. for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
8
Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
X X X X X X X
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
X X X X X X X
brake function.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs (2.4L En-
X X X X X
gine). **
Replace spark plugs (3.6L En-
X
gine). **
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(whichever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Change the automatic transmis-

X
sion fluid and filter.
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following: X X
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing. 8
Replace rear drive assembly
X X
(RDA) fluid.
Replace power transfer unit (PTU)
X X
fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .487
9
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .485 In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .485
484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare For The Appointment interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
a maintenance log of your vehicles service history. This concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
can often provide a clue to the current problem. The manufacturers authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
Prepare A List
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the timely manner.
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service advisor know. service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
If you list a number of items and you must have your general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the They want to know if you need assistance.
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
you may contact the manufacturers customer center.
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 485
Any communication to the manufacturers customer center In Mexico Contact
should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Owners name and address
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Owners telephone number (home and office)
Mexico, D. F.
Authorized dealer name
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA US LLC Customer Center
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 218004
P.O. Box 191857
Auburn Hills, MI 483218004
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343 9
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
Fax: (787) 782-3345
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ers Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
(800) 387-9983 French).
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access tract that is not the manufacturers service contract. It is not
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by facturers service contract. If you purchased a service
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. contract that is not a manufacturers service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturers New Vehicle
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
ments.
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator. We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
Service Contract
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
after the manufacturers New Vehicle Limited Warranty sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu- concerns.
facturers service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turers service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 487
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARNING!
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo- If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should imme-
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other diately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con- istration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
tained in vehicles and certain products of component If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
reproductive harm. campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized dealer
WARRANTY INFORMATION or FCA US LLC.
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline 9
for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
applicable to this vehicle and market. http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
MOPAR PARTS
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail- safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
In Canada
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best. If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
roadsafety/
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
To order the following manuals, you may use either the the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master- ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. list of all tools and equipment.
If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order
form. Owners Manuals
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manu- These Owners Manuals have been prepared with the
als (no P.O. Boxes). assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
Service Manuals starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
mation that students and professional technicians need in Call toll free at:
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
INDEX
10
490 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 343 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 320
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 314
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438, 439
Adding Washer Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Adjust Alarm, Panic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 228
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 472
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 425 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 82, 226 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .437 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329, 451
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453, 475
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319, 439 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
INDEX 491
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453 Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Brake, Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343, 449
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 475
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .199 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230, 437 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465, 467
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 465
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Bluetooth Caps, Filler
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 10
Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429, 435
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 129 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 383
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 115 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
492 INDEX
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Rollaway Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Cleaning
Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 387 Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Connector
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .432 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . . .295
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Child Restraints Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .74 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 448
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . .68 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .63 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
INDEX 493
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Door Locks
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .446, 472, 473 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204, 459 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Driving
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Driving To Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . . .245
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System). . . . . . . . .280
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .199
Dipsticks Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 10
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Disposal Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .177
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .231
Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
494 INDEX
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 436
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .432 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .56, 425
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381, 384
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 383
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 443
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429, 430 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 473
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 383 Filters
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319, 439
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437, 473
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 472, 473 Flashers
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429, 435 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 171, 241
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 472 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
INDEX 495
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381, 384
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 473
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Fluid Level Checks Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 453 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 475 Fuel, Flexible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Fueling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340, 475 Fuel Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 10
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 468
Fog Light Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .190, 195
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 164 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386, 431
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Gasoline (Fuel)
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
496 INDEX
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Gear Select Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . .171
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 390 Hitches
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 389 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Hazard HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Ignition
Headlights Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 241
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Instrument Cluster Display
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .171 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Instrument Panel And Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 175 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Head Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
INDEX 497
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Lane Change And Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407, 410 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Key Fob Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 465
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 168
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 82, 226
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .18 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 10
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . .16, 18 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 326 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 242
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
498 INDEX
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 468 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .235, 374
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 467 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 171, 241, 467, 469
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 175 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .228, 241
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 467 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387, 389
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Load Shed
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .233 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240, 467 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465, 467
INDEX 499
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 487
Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .233, 432 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Manual Transaxle New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 473
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 473
Mini-Trip Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 189 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244, 435
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 10
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437, 473
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Mode Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 472
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
500 INDEX
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 436, 472 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Operator Manual (Owners Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Power Seats
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Owners Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .4, 488 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454, 475
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . . . .163 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Pretensioners
Phone (Pairing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 111 Programming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . .16
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .359
Power Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
INDEX 501
Radio Frequency Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 13, 19, 22, 30 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 314 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .296
Rear Cupholder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Remote Starting
Rear Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Rear Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . .21
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 164 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 164 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 10
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Reverse Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Remote Control Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
502 INDEX
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 151
Seat Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . .41 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 154
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 164
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 164
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 159, 164
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 228
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 82 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 SENTRY KEY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . . .41 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 37, 39 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
INDEX 503
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 171, 241, 469 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366, 367, 368, 407 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .296
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Specifications Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Sunglasses Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Speed Control Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . .48
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 325 10
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Taillights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . .358, 359
Steering Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 362, 366, 373
504 INDEX
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362, 366 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 338
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358, 359 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 362 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366, 368, 407 Transaxle
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Transmission
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329, 451
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
INDEX 505
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 453 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . .190 Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Far End Audio Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 241, 469 Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 115
Join Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 125
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Uconnect Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 129 Natural Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 114
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 114 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 122 Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 126 Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 252 Toggling Between Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone . . . .107, 129
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 129 Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 22 Ways To Initiate A Phone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Uconnect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 96, 111, 114, 115 Uconnect Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 17
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 10
Currently In Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Bluetooth Communication Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name . . . . . . . .101, 123 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . . .295
Call Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Universal Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Call Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 123 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Cancel Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 115 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
506 INDEX
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 174
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359, 387, 389 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .13 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 436 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Wiper, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 174, 443
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 199
Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicles electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
17JC49-126-AA
2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. First Edition
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.

Dodge Journey 2017 - Owner's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dodge Journey 2017 - Owner's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dodge Journey 2017 - Owner's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some safety tips mentioned regarding drinking and driving?

What are some safety tips mentioned regarding drinking and driving?

What sections does the owner's manual cover?

What sections does the owner's manual cover?

2017

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 5

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 6

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 7

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 8

Stamped VIN Location

Emergency Key Removal

WARNING! Power Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Recommended Type Of Child Re-

Booster Seat Proper Belt Use

Recommended Type Of Child

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH 2

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

Rear Seat Lower Anchorages Tether Anchorages (Second Row 60/40)

Seat Track Release Lever

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Power Mirror Switches

Mobile Phone Pairing

1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen.

Add From Mobile

Remove From Favorites

Voice Text List Voice Text Reply

Preset Message List

Preset Message List 8. Thanks.

18. See you later.

NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face

When you push the Uconnect Voice Command button,

NOTE: You can replace 8 with any other satellite channel

NOTE: Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only

NOTE: Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top

NOTE: Navigation commands only work if equipped with

NOTE: Auto Services, Hospitals, Parking, Airport,

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

Power Lumbar If Equipped

NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to

4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.

Manual Seat Adjustment

Seatback/Armrest Second Row Passenger Seat

Stadium Tip n Slide (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) Seven

Hood Prop Rod